summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/old/69684-0.txt
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
Diffstat (limited to 'old/69684-0.txt')
-rw-r--r--old/69684-0.txt7655
1 files changed, 0 insertions, 7655 deletions
diff --git a/old/69684-0.txt b/old/69684-0.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index a8f144b..0000000
--- a/old/69684-0.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,7655 +0,0 @@
-The Project Gutenberg eBook of Red blight, by Mary Lamar Knight
-
-This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and
-most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
-whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms
-of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at
-www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you
-will have to check the laws of the country where you are located before
-using this eBook.
-
-Title: Red blight
-
-Author: Mary Lamar Knight
-
-Release Date: January 2, 2023 [eBook #69684]
-
-Language: English
-
-Produced by: Tim Lindell, Bob Taylor and the Online Distributed
- Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This book was
- produced from images made available by the HathiTrust
- Digital Library.)
-
-*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK RED BLIGHT ***
-
-
-
-
-
- Transcriber’s Note
-
- Italic text displayed as: _italic_
-
-
-
-
- RED
- BLIGHT
-
-
- Order Extra Copies From
- _CHRISTIAN NATIONALIST
- CRUSADE_
- P. O. Box D-4
- St. Louis 1, Missouri
-
-
-
-
- To
-
-
- _Everyone everywhere who would help to make the “lure” of freedom
- so irresistible that the false promises of security, made by the
- Communists, will be seen for what they are—a delusion and a fraud._
-
-
-
-
- RED
- BLIGHT
-
- by
- MARY LAMAR KNIGHT
-
- [Illustration: Star symbol]
-
-
- LORRIN L. MORRISON
- _Publisher
- Los Angeles_
-
-
-
-
- COPYRIGHT, 1951
- BY
- MARY LAMAR KNIGHT
-
-
- FIRST PRINTING
- IN TWO EDITIONS:
- _Paper Bound, June, 1951_
- _Cloth Bound, June, 1951_
-
-
- Printed in the United States of America by
- LORRIN L. MORRISON, _Printing and Publishing_
- 1915 So. Western Ave., Los Angeles 18, Calif.
- All rights reserved, including the rights of reproduction,
- in whole or in part, in any form.
-
-
-
-
- AUTHOR’S NOTE
-
-
-The opinions expressed in this book represent only one individual’s
-point of view. They are based upon what I, myself, have seen and
-heard and are subject, therefore, to human error, preferences and
-prejudices. I ask only that they be considered in this light, and
-hope that they may serve to stimulate independent thinking and
-inquiry.
-
-What I am reporting I have experienced personally or learned from the
-most reliable sources at my command. If I succeed only in a small
-measure in conveying my thoughts and opinions, it is, nonetheless, a
-load off my chest, and I shall sleep more easily for having made a
-sincere, if limited, contribution toward a better understanding of
-our present disheartening dilemma.
-
- MARY LAMAR KNIGHT
-
-
-
-
- _Table of Contents_
-
-
- _Introduction_ 1
-
- _Chapter I—Incompetence or Treachery?_ 7
-
- _Chapter II—Yenan Interlude_ 29
-
- _Chapter III—Communist Personalities_ 45
-
- _Chapter IV—Communism’s Forebears_ 70
-
- _Chapter V—Communist Propaganda_ 82
-
- _Chapter VI—Manchuria, the Prize_ 94
-
- _Chapter VII—The Tragedy of the Generalissimo_ 102
-
- _Chapter VIII—Behind the Red Curtain_ 117
-
- _Chapter IX—Quo Vadis?_ 131
-
- _Appendix_ 151
-
- _Bibliography_ 189
-
- _Index_ 193
-
- _About the Author_ 199
-
-
-
-
- _Introduction_
-
-
-The “lure” of Communism is the same in every country—the promise of
-security and a richer life for all, with less pain and effort to
-the individual from the cradle to the grave. We have only to think
-clearly, however, to realize that such promises are impossible of
-fulfillment in a Communist State. Never has progress been made in
-that direction except where there was personal freedom, initiative
-and enterprise, for these are the qualities that take civilization
-forward _toward_ Perfection, instead of backward _into_ Chaos.
-The theories of Marx and Engels have been used and misused by the
-Soviets. As far as their present laws are concerned, the “Yassa” of
-Genghis Khan would have served the purpose, had it been as well known
-in the Twentieth Century as it was in the Thirteenth.
-
-In studying the historical backgrounds of those great movements
-which, at various times in the past, have churned up the quietude
-of the earth, I found that they were always propelled or motivated
-by extreme fanaticism. A distinctive feature of all of them seems
-to be the desire to change the established order by revolution and
-intrigue, as well as by military conquest. These movements are
-opposed not only by the diehards, but by the believers in evolution
-and slow change; not only by the wealthy and comfortable, but by the
-practical men of affairs. All of this has been happening since the
-beginning of history. Believers in the established order of things
-always are on the defensive. Only open and direct attack stirs them
-to the offensive. This last is true of the United States, and it is
-also true of China. It is difficult for the rulers of peace-loving
-nations to create or inspire prolonged hatred in those who must do
-their bidding. This fact has been one of Stalin’s major worries with
-respect to the Chinese Communists. His predecessor, Trotsky, gave
-them up as impossible. “The Chinese have no capacity for sustained
-mass indignation,” Trotsky has been quoted as saying. “As Communists
-they are hopeless.”
-
-Everyone who has lived in China learns to respect and to love the
-Chinese people. No nation on earth has left a greater endowment
-in wealth of artistic accomplishment or evolved a more workable
-philosophy than has China. Even the poorest coolie is acquainted with
-some of the simple lessons contained in the Classics.
-
-As a correspondent in China for the United Press Associations, I
-learned to admire the people deeply. When in 1946 I was invited
-by the United Nations Relief and Rehabilitation Administration to
-spend six months there as a consultant, without compensation, I was
-delighted at the opportunity to return. Each time, I increased my
-knowledge and improved my understanding of the country and made an
-earnest effort to comprehend the divergent forces underlying modern
-China and to gauge their effect upon the peace of the world.
-
-The red blight, as everyone knows, is world wide, but I have focused
-my attention on China because it is the part of the world I know
-best. I saw the blight spread over this area with sickening rapidity
-in 1936, and again in 1946.
-
-On both my trips, I travelled slowly from Singapore through most of
-the major cities to Manchuria, where I remained for a considerable
-length of time. Manchuria in 1946 had changed radically from
-Manchuria in 1936. The Russians had supplanted the Japanese, and two
-wars in the brief span of ten years had left their tragic imprint.
-
-The more I travelled, and the more I read and studied, the more
-aware I became of the pattern underlying the great upheavals, not
-only in China but throughout Eurasia. Each eruption had moved in
-a cycle from tribal communism to communistic imperialism, and
-then to a dictatorship so despotic that its tyranny lasted in
-some instances for generations. Invariably, the dictatorship fell
-into dissolution and decline, followed by desolation and chaos.
-The despots engineering these movements were all nurtured on the
-vast steppe-lands, and they never attempted the invasion of their
-more civilized neighbors until their own strength was such that no
-opposing army could match them.
-
-Stalin, the latest of these despots, is as barbaric as his
-predecessors. Certainly, no one could intimate that his methods are
-even remotely civilized. He has “refined” and “distilled” their
-characteristic brutality to an exacting degree. It took him fifteen
-years to turn his own people from the techniques of Lenin to those of
-his own fiendish thuggery. He has “conquered, bamboozled, outsmarted
-and trapped” more than nine hundred million people into “political
-and moral paralysis.”
-
-Are we also going to fall victims to the machinations of this
-latest of these world shakers? Will we be sucked in through fear or
-blandishment? Or have we the common sense, the spiritual development
-and the _will_ to save ourselves? Human nature has changed little
-during the history of mankind. Our challenge now is to try to develop
-our spiritual growth so that it will be commensurate with our
-fantastic material growth.
-
-A strong Nationalism made us great, as it has all nations that have
-risen to world power. To maintain this power, however, requires the
-intelligence and wisdom of our Founding Fathers, who, by their use of
-initiative, ingenuity, enterprise and prayerful determination, made
-us the Historic United States. Is it possible that recent generations
-of American men and women have lost these qualities and have failed
-to achieve complete maturity?
-
-I keep asking myself: Is “civilized” man intelligent enough, in the
-light of his own past experience, to stop this human tragedy now, and
-perhaps for a foreseeable future? Or, will he become hopelessly and
-irrevocably lost in the futile contemplation of an idyllic dream that
-is ages old, but that never has become a reality, and never will.
-
-
-
-
- PROLOGUE
-
-
- _Oh Man, thou feeble tenant of an hour,
- Debased by slavery, debauched by power;
- Thy love is lust; thy friendship a cheat;
- Hypocrisy thy smile; thy word deceit—
- Thy nature ennobled but by name,
- The very beasts might bid thee blush for shame._
-
- LORD BYRON
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER I
-
- _Incompetence or Treachery?_
-
-
-“The greatest single mistake made in China, leading to our present
-debacle, was the withdrawal of United States forces from the Peking,
-Tientsin, Chingwangtao triangle in 1947.” This was done obviously at
-the direction of President Truman, General George Marshall and the
-State Department.
-
-This statement comes from Major General William Arthur Worton,
-Chief of Staff, Third Amphibious Corps, U. S. Marines in China,
-1945-1946, but with twelve years prior experience there. He adds:
-“Twenty-five thousand men easily could have maintained this important
-triangle—Peking, Tientsin, Chingwangtao—which would have kept the
-Chinese Communists from moving South of the Great Wall. They were
-not strong at that time, and a display of American strength in
-Nationalist China would have served as a deterrent to them.”
-
-Instead, our withdrawal of U. S. forces from this strategic area
-was the first show of American weakness that gave the lie to both
-Nationalist and Communist Chinese, if not to the whole of Eurasia.
-The Russians constantly had complained that the Americans were
-occupying sovereign territory of China, but the request for us to
-do so had been made in 1945 by Generalissimo Chiang Kai-shek’s
-Nationalist Government for the purpose of disarming the Japanese and
-of stabilizing the country.
-
-General Worton, with five officers and a handful of men first moved
-into the area in August, 1945, turning the civil government of China
-over to the Nationalists. A month later, a force of sixty-five
-thousand U. S. Marines moved in and occupied the area, and from then
-on to 1947, there was relative peace and quiet.
-
-In view of the testimony of General George C. Marshall before the
-joint houses of Congress on the hypothetical issue that if we permit
-Chiang’s forces to attack South China, we will be starting a global
-war, I would like to quote General Worton on a similar issue.
-
-“The occupation of Peking was not specifically in my orders,” he
-says, “but I was to occupy whatever strategic territory I deemed
-necessary. In the triangle previously referred to, was located the
-important mining area of Kailan at Tang Shan, which supplied the
-coal output of 150,000 tons per month, and the Nan Yuan, Pei Yuan
-Airfields. When I determined that the Communists would go into Peking
-if I did not, I decided to occupy Peking. At eleven o’clock one
-evening, Chou En-lai’s agent in Tientsin informed me that if I moved
-on Peking, the lives of every American Marine would be the price.
-I told him I was going into Peking, just when and where our forces
-would enter, and that he had better have as strong a force as I
-intended to have, and that I would also be supported by an air cover.
-We followed our blueprint, and not one of our men was scratched. We
-had no opposition whatsoever.”
-
-With the withdrawal of U. S. forces from this area the coal output,
-supplying power as far south as Shanghai, dropped to 30,000 tons.
-
-In Worton’s opinion, “as small a force as 15,000 troops, officered
-by men acquainted with China, could have kept the Reds from crossing
-into the coveted triangle.”
-
-But Marshall was determined to withdraw our forces. “The State
-Department to this day,” says Worton, “has never asked the opinion,
-as far I can ascertain, of any qualified military men who spent any
-length of time in China, on this subject.” He adds, “Manchuria should
-have been occupied and we should have insisted on a joint occupation
-force there with our allies. Any study of China and the Far East must
-be predicated upon a study of our relations with China since 1784. We
-have consistently held to the Open Door Policy for China and the Far
-East. We went to war with Japan because Japan had seized the coastal
-areas and was controlling the communication lines of China. Many men
-died across the Pacific to regain China for the free world, and yet,
-in the course of minutes, as time is known, we have lost China. It is
-a truism of students of the Far East that, ‘As China goes, so goes
-the Orient’.”
-
-The U. S. should have taken Dairen, Port Arthur and Cheefoo, while we
-were at it, and should have insisted on occupying the Kalgan Pass,
-gateway to Mongolia. These rightfully belonged to the Nationalist
-Government at the conclusion of the Japanese war, according to
-Worton. Another disastrous move on the part of the U. S. was the
-recall of Lieutenant General Albert C. Wedemeyer from the China
-Theater. “Wedemeyer had the complete admiration and respect of the
-Chinese,” he says. “Although he had been the Generalissimo’s Chief
-of Staff for nearly three years during the war, at no time had he
-subordinated himself to Chiang. Wedemeyer was first, last and always
-an American, and an officer in the service of his country.”
-
-Others claim that China’s and the world’s present situation can be
-attributed to any number of mistakes on the part of Chiang Kai-shek,
-General Marshall and the United States Government. Ignoring the
-tragedy of Yalta for the moment, one vitally important mistake Chiang
-made was the decision to fly his troops into Manchuria after the war,
-against the advice of General Wedemeyer. His mistake was an honest
-one, because he undoubtedly felt that the United States, having gone
-so far, would see him through to the end. He knew that if China were
-to occupy her rightful place in the world, control of the industrial
-potential of Manchuria was a “must.” In spite of the fateful decision
-at Yalta, about which Chiang was informed several months later by
-Ambassador Hurley, he still could not believe that Roosevelt, whom he
-deeply respected and admired, would slap him in the face by giving
-away Manchuria.
-
-Truman, inheriting Roosevelt’s policy of appeasement toward Russia,
-sent General Marshall to China in 1946 on the impossible mission of
-forcing the Generalissimo to accept Communists into his Government.
-Marshall, who at that time had the admiration and respect of the
-entire United States, undoubtedly had a freer hand than any diplomat
-in our history. Had he been unbiased in his judgement, the future of
-China, Asia, and probably the Eurasian Continent would have been
-different. He had unlimited resources to give, a neat nest egg of
-$500,000,000, and the decision to spend some, all, or none of it was
-his, and his alone.
-
-When Marshall arrived in China, the Nationalist Armies were
-over-extended, that is, their supply lines were stretched so long
-and so thin that they could not be protected from constant Communist
-raids. Chiang’s Armies held the main lines of communication, to be
-sure, and all the large cities of North China and a few in Manchuria.
-However, these Armies, although many of them were trained and
-equipped with American arms, had little ammunition, and they were
-surrounded on all sides by the Soviet-backed Communist Armies. The
-Communists retained the initiative, could strike when and where they
-wished, and thus succeeded in keeping their opponents paralyzed.
-It was not difficult to see that the future of Chiang’s Armies was
-dependent solely on aid, especially on munitions, and that no country
-on earth but the United States could supply their requirements. To
-shut off this aid meant strangulation and death.
-
-Marshall’s first act was to set up a headquarters in Chungking, where
-he assembled his American experts on China and started a series
-of conferences with Communist and Nationalist leaders. From the
-beginning, the Chinese Communists showed, by their every action, that
-their only interest was in cutting off North China and Manchuria.
-They had no intention whatever of joining any kind of coalition
-government, over which they would not have complete control. After a
-great deal of discussion, these conferences resulted in superficial
-agreement on a few points of the controversy.
-
-Prior to his return to Washington, the General decided to make a
-hasty trip to Yenan, probably out of curiosity. He must have wanted
-a closer look at these people whose propaganda he appeared to have
-accepted as fact during the entire war. Whether this was emotional
-caprice or political expediency only history can tell. We cannot
-assume that he was ignorant, therefore we must assume that he knew
-what he was doing.
-
-Certainly the utterances of that period indicated that Marshall
-subscribed to the idea that we were dealing with “agrarian reformers.”
-
-In his testimony before Congress, Marshall stated flatly that he had
-known all the time that the Chinese Communists were Marxists “because
-they told me so,” he said. But while he was negotiating with them he
-certainly gave the impression to others that he did not think they
-were the same brand of Communists as were the Russians. This fact,
-in itself, makes him doubly culpable, in my opinion. It is an intent
-to deceive, which makes the deception all the more sinister. If he
-knew all the time that the Chinese Communists were the same brand of
-Communists as the Russians, and he still threw the weight of every
-decision he made in China to them, then he could not possibly have
-given more aid and comfort to the enemy, Stalin, had he been a member
-of the Communist Party.
-
-On Marshall’s arrival at the Airport of Yenan, he was greeted with
-pomp and ceremony by every military unit the Communists could muster.
-Welcomed enthusiastically by stocky Mao Tse-tung, in his coarse
-homespun peasant’s garb, suave Chou En-lai, in the snappy uniform
-of a three-star General, and Chu Teh, wearing a Russian soldier’s
-fur-lined cape, he accompanied his colorful and grateful hosts on
-an inspection of the troops. The Cadets from the Communist Military
-Academy, who had hiked in some fifty or sixty miles in order to form
-the Guard of Honor, were the best dressed and best outfitted of all
-the troops in the Communist Army. While spartanly clad in coarse
-but neat dark blue uniforms, they gave every evidence of superb
-leadership and discipline. Especially trained and selected, these
-Cadets became the equivalent, in Communist China, of the Soviet NKVD,
-or uniformed police troops.
-
-In marked contrast, there was a battalion of Ming Bing, or militia,
-armed with spears for the occasion and lined up for the General’s
-inspection. These troops were dressed in everything from long robes
-to dirty white jackets and vests, and decorated with rings, bracelets
-and earrings. Their long, rusty spears were topped with flowering
-pompoms of dried grain. In no respect did they differ from their
-forbears of two thousand years ago.
-
-The rest of the show consisted of masses of people in the drab
-dress affected by the Communists. The more colorful costumes of the
-non-Communist Yenanese were conspicuous by their absence.
-
-Marshall must have been impressed!
-
-For quarters, or hotel accommodations, the General had been assigned
-the best Yenan cave, boasting all the comforts offered by that
-archaic type of dwelling. His person was safeguarded during the night
-by two crack soldiers armed with ancient Chinese broadswords.
-
-Making the most of their distinguished visitor’s sojourn among
-them, Chairman Mao Tse-tung gave a banquet, followed by a Chinese
-Opera. The dinner was staged in a large bare room with cracking
-plaster walls. The table consisted of rough hewn boards, contrasting
-strangely with the lavishness of the food. Dozens of southern style
-delicacies were imported for the occasion: crisp, roasted Peking
-duck; succulent sweet and sour pork; thousand-year-old eggs—the
-whole washed down with copious draughts of sweet local wine. Formal
-speeches of mutual friendship were followed by cries of “Gambei!” or
-“Bottoms up!”
-
-After the banquet, the entire party crossed the river to attend
-the Opera. The Communists had improvised a crude bridge over which
-their esteemed guest might ride, but it was so wobbly that Marshall
-preferred to get out and follow his car across.
-
-The Opera was performed in an unheated, barnlike structure. It was so
-cold that the audience kept on their heavy coats and were provided,
-in addition, with blankets to wrap around their feet. In spite of the
-fact that charcoal braziers were placed between the stage and the
-first row, the temperature in the building was close to freezing,
-and the breath of the actors as they chanted their lines came out in
-puffs of smoke. These performers were Spartans indeed, changing their
-costumes in the draughty, unheated barn, their teeth chattering and
-their tawny flesh a mass of goose pimples. The costumes, in contrast
-to those seen on a Peking or a Shanghai stage, were fashioned of
-rough, drab bits of cast-off apparel, crudely sewn together and
-patched with whatever pieces of material could be begged, borrowed or
-stolen.
-
-The show itself, like the Ballet in Moscow, was a superb exhibition
-of Chinese art, for, when shown to foreigners, it was free from
-Communist propaganda. The falsetto voices of the actors sing-songed
-the ancient Chinese poetry, while their bodies swayed to its rhythmic
-cadence. During the performance, an usher went up and down the aisle
-tossing hot towels to guests who called shrilly for them. These,
-wrung out of boiling water, gave the hall a dank, slightly rancid
-atmosphere, reminiscent of a river in summer. Roasted watermelon
-seeds were pressed generously upon the honored guest by his Chinese
-Communist hosts, who were noisily but skillfully cracking them
-edgewise between their strong front teeth and spitting out the husks.
-
-Not all the visitor’s stay, however, was passed in entertainment.
-Before leaving Yenan, General Marshall sat behind locked doors with
-Mao and members of the Politburo. No other American was allowed to be
-present at this meeting. What was said is not known, but there were
-rumors in Communist circles that the subject of the conversations had
-to do with the future of Manchuria, and perhaps all of Asia.
-
-On leaving this capital city of Communist China, Marshall returned to
-the United States to make his report to President Truman.
-
-When he came back to China, Marshall made his residence in Nanking
-(the Nationalist capital at that time), but established a Northern
-Headquarters in Peiping (meaning Northern Peace), in order to work
-out a truce between Communists and Nationalists. The futility of
-this endeavor was obvious even to the Chinese GI, who nicknamed the
-Peiping Headquarters the “Temple of the Thousand Sleeping Colonels,”
-and to the American GI, who dubbed it “Marshall’s Bird Sanctuary.”
-
-If the soldiers in the lower brackets put their tongues in their
-cheeks, those in the higher echelons took the mission very seriously.
-They kept a very sober face, indeed. Shoulder patches were issued and
-worn by all the members of the Peiping Headquarters and its truce
-teams. These were called “Ballentine Beer Patches,” due to the three
-rings in the emblem representing the Nationalists, the Communists and
-the Americans. No doubt this symbol, to some of the homesick GI’s,
-was a nostalgic reminder of the good old USA.
-
-Truce teams, made up of one Communist, one Nationalist and one
-American officer, were sent out into the field, their purpose being
-to try to bring about agreement between the opposing forces. With
-the Chinese Communist Army and the Nationalist Army locked in a
-deadly battle for power, any action on the part of the third member,
-the United States, would be likely to aid one party only at the
-expense of the other. With Marshall’s preference for Mao over Chiang
-Kai-shek, the “truces” forced upon the Nationalist Armies at the
-most inopportune times, from a military standpoint, acted to the
-advantage of the Chinese Communist Army. Because of the slowness of
-their transportation and their lack of modern means of training,
-the Chinese Communist Armies, as in the days of Genghis Khan, were
-constantly in need of breathing spells. During these periods they
-could regroup their forces, move and gather supplies, and train their
-troops. Such breathing spells, provided in the form of “Cease Fire!”
-commands to the Nationalist Armies, upon the insistence of Marshall,
-came almost as a gift from Heaven.
-
-As history has shown, Marshall threw the weight of every decision to
-the Communists. This, combined with the mistake the Generalissimo
-made in trying to hold Manchuria without American support, would
-appear to be at least one of the reasons for the situation in China
-today. In addition to the fact that Marshall favored the Communists,
-that he acquiesced in the sellout of Manchuria, if not all of Asia,
-to the Russians, the final and fatal blow was delivered to the
-Nationalist Government itself. The expected help in arms, ammunition,
-money and supplies from the United States was either cut off entirely
-or reduced to a trickle. Too late did the Nationalist Government
-recognize its precarious position and force itself to accept the fact
-that, apparently, we just did not care who won the fight in China, so
-long as it was not the Generalissimo.
-
-Continued evidence to the above effect appeared from numerous
-sources. In the summer of 1950, Walter H. Judd, Representative from
-Minnesota, commented in public:
-
-“Why should the Soviets think that the most important thing for
-American Communists to do right after the defeat of Japan was to get
-American assistance to China stopped?” To him, the answer seems to
-appear obvious, in that without the right kind of outside aid, the
-Chinese Government could not possibly recover. Only a handful of
-people appeared to understand that, to a Chinese, the idea of putting
-his country ahead of family interests, just was not his idea of
-patriotism. First loyalty, always, in a Chinese family, was to that
-family.
-
-Marshall asked for patience and generosity for the European countries
-saying that it had taken the South fifty years to recover from only
-four years of civil war. But he did not seem to remember that Chiang
-had been fighting Japan for more than eight years, coupled with a
-civil war with Communists in his own country for more than twenty
-years. China, too, needed a little patience and generosity from us,
-just as much as Italy or Greece or France. And what would England
-have done without our patience and generosity? By comparison, were
-not China’s needs embarrassingly small?
-
-One may call the Nationalist Government of China all the names
-there are, synonymous with corrupt, incompetent, reactionary,
-undemocratic—but in the light of what is known today about Communism
-and its stated methods, aims and ambitions, which is the lesser of
-the two evils—Chinese Nationalism or Soviet Internationalism?
-
-An interesting news item came to light in a press dispatch by
-International News Service, dated September 19, 1950, as follows:
-“Marshall’s statement on Far Eastern Policy electrified the jammed
-committee room (Senate Armed Services Committee) because it had been
-accepted for years that he had authored the recommendation that
-peace in China be sought through a coalition government. Before this
-committee, Marshall repudiated all claims for having had anything to
-do with it, much less to have authored it by saying that it had been
-drawn up in the State Department while he was testifying on Capitol
-Hill in the Pearl Harbor investigation.” According to the same news
-dispatch: “The author of the Marshall Plan added that the Chinese
-policy was issued ‘while I was on the ocean going over there’ as
-President Truman’s personal representative.”
-
-Could Marshall have meant that he had not even been consulted on such
-an important matter, prior to being sent to implement that policy?
-Hardly. Former Secretary of State Byrnes, in his memoirs entitled
-“_Speaking Frankly_,” spoke thus frankly on this subject:
-
-“As soon as President Truman appointed General Marshall his personal
-representative in China, I asked the General to study the draft
-(of policy) so that he could help prepare the final statement for
-presentation to the President. The Sunday before I left for Moscow,
-Under Secretary Acheson, General Marshall and members of his staff
-met in my office. By the end of the morning’s discussion, we had
-agreed upon the statement of policy. Thereafter the President made
-no change in that policy except upon the recommendation of General
-Marshall or with his approval.”
-
-I learned from an intimate source that when Marshall left for China
-he had in his pocket, documents outlining the policy of enforcing a
-coalition government on Chiang Kai-shek and also a letter from the
-President stating flatly:
-
-“I understand that these documents have been shown to you and have
-received your approval.” What could General Marshall think himself to
-be, an ostrich with his head in the sand?
-
-Much has happened since 1946, particularly as pertains to the
-relationship between China and General Marshall. A few excerpts from
-the September 15th, 1950, issue of the _Congressional Record_, Volume
-96, Number 184, bring the matter further to a head. Senator William
-E. Jenner from Indiana holds the floor:
-
- “I believe the time has come to expose this whole tragic conspiracy
- in which we are caught, to hew to the line of truth, and to let
- the chips fall where they may.... I can assure the Senate there
- is no pleasure, no pride of authorship, and no sense of personal
- satisfaction in taking this stand. There is only a growing sense
- of shame, of outraged decency, and of painful duty as I speak the
- dictates of my conscience. Even if I have to stand and speak alone,
- I am both unable and unwilling by my silence to be an accomplice
- in compounding crimes that have already been committed against my
- native land. Mr. President, this background is necessary because
- without it we cannot understand where the appointment of General
- George C. Marshall as Secretary of Defense fits into the picture.
- With it, we can help the disillusionment of the American people to
- run its course by exposing General Marshall as a living symbol of
- the swindle in which we are caught. The appointment of Marshall at
- this peculiar juncture in our destiny is a last desperate attempt of
- this administration to swallow up the treachery of the past in the
- new treachery they are planning for the future.... Everything he has
- been a party to during the past ten years has helped to betray his
- solemn trust and to set the stage for the staggering Soviet victory
- that is sweeping across the earth....”
-
-Senator Jenner’s full and documented statements cover eighteen pages
-of the _Record_ but interest here is centered upon those comments
-bearing on China, which confirm my own first-hand information
-and knowledge. He goes back to April 26, 1938, when Marshall was
-appointed a member of the liaison committee created by President
-Roosevelt for the coordination of policy of common concern to the
-Departments of State, War and Navy. From then on, Marshall remained
-one of the top-ranking policy makers in our Government. Truman was
-aware of the closeness between Marshall and Roosevelt, and of their
-consultations on matters of vital policy affecting our security and
-the defending of our interests around the world. Was this, perhaps, a
-reason for Truman’s wanting Marshall as Secretary of Defense, even as
-a possible stop-gap in a Democratic political crisis?
-
-“Marshall knew of the deceit and the duplicity that was indulged in
-by President Roosevelt during the critical years of 1939, 1940 and
-1941, by which we were secretly committed to go to war.... He went
-along with the most criminal and outrageous betrayals of American
-interests and principles in history that resulted from Teheran, Yalta
-and Potsdam,” says Jenner. To anyone’s comment: “He was a soldier.
-He was taking orders,” I feel urged to ask: “Does there not come a
-time in everyone’s life when he has to decide whether he is first a
-citizen of integrity? General of the Army Douglas MacArthur made that
-decision in April, 1951, and made it unflinchingly.
-
-“At Yalta,” Jenner adds, “the President did the age-old thing with
-regard to Asia and General Marshall knew that at Potsdam, President
-Truman confirmed the sellout of half the world to the Soviet Union
-... this meant that American GI’s were turned into political whipping
-boys, betrayed by their own Chief of Staff and used for advancing
-the cause of Communism across the earth.... Marshall lent all of his
-great prestige and power to the Jessup-Lattimore-Service-Acheson line
-calling for a cessation of the civil war, paralyzing the Nationalist
-Government and withholding aid from Chiang, while he knew that the
-Russians were not only taking over Manchuria and northern China,
-but were being rearmed with captured Japanese equipment and were
-preparing for the eventual conquest, not only of China, but of the
-whole Far East.”
-
-Harold Lamb, historian and authority on Asiatic history, has
-commented: “Curiously enough, when I began to study the Mongols
-nearly thirty years ago, I found two studies of the methods of
-Genghis Khan made by young American Army officers. They were George
-C. Marshall and Douglas MacArthur.” How differently these two men
-have interpreted their research, in the light of their subsequent
-actions!
-
-Let me quote a remark or two from the March, 1951, issue of _The
-American Mercury_. I have high regard for the journalistic integrity
-of Walter Trohan, Washington, D. C., Bureau Manager of _The Chicago
-Tribune_, and concur heartily with his comments in an article
-entitled: “_The Tragedy of George Marshall_”:
-
- “On March 19, 1950, General Marshall announced that he would not
- write his memoirs for these remarkable reasons:
- “‘To be of any historic importance they have got to be accurate;
- that is one mustn’t omit, and make it pleasant reading. Now, if
- you do put it all in, you do irreparable harm. You almost ruin a
- man, but if you don’t mention that, it is not history’.”
-
-
-Mr. Trohan states that these are disillusioning words, and imply that
-“free men must not be told the truth; they indicate that the speaker
-is in a mental purgatory for hidden sins which he has either observed
-or committed; and they emphasize the graver tragedy: that an old man
-who must conceal past errors from his countrymen is still exercising
-powers of decision.”
-
-Trohan asks, and so do I: “Should free men trust a leader who will
-not trust them with the truth? By what right does a public servant
-say to free men: ‘You trusted me with leadership, but I will not give
-a true accounting because the truth might do irreparable harm’?”
-
-Marshall has ever been quick to blame the people for the ills that
-may beset them—never the leaders, as warrant a remark he made
-following the debacle of the Korean war: “The basic error has always
-been with the American people”—these same American people who cannot
-be trusted with the truth, lest “irreparable harm” be done.
-
-Other indications as to the stature of the man reveal themselves as
-isolated vignettes. When Marshall arrived in China and was met by
-General Albert C. Wedemeyer, even after he had read and suppressed
-the _Wedemeyer Report_, he told his junior officer of his intention
-with regard to forcing Communists on the Generalissimo. Wedemeyer
-commented in all calmness:
-
-“General, you can’t do it. It is impossible!”
-
-To which Marshall replied in white heat: “I am going to do it, and
-_you_ are going to help me!”
-
-Marshall’s double-cross of Wedemeyer in appointing the latter
-Ambassador to China in 1947 is another instance. Secretary of State
-James Byrnes had told Wedemeyer to go ahead and buy his civilian
-clothing, which he did, and as Wedemeyer was on the point of severing
-his last connections from the Army, Marshall learned that the
-Communists strongly opposed the Wedemeyer appointment and recommended
-instead, J. Leighton Stuart, President of Yenching University.
-Without consulting with or informing General Wedemeyer, Marshall
-immediately appointed Stuart, leaving Wedemeyer to find out through
-second-hand sources that he was no longer Ambassador-elect to China.
-
-A parallel action of this nature in which Marshall had a direct hand
-was the midnight dismissal of General MacArthur, who learned of the
-order when an aide heard it on a radio news broadcast and relayed it
-to Mrs. MacArthur.
-
-Again, with reference to Marshall’s so-called ignorance of the China
-policy situation, Jonathan Daniels, in his authorized biography of
-Truman, quotes Admiral William D. Leahy as saying: “I was present
-when Marshall was going to China. He said he was going to tell Chiang
-that he had to get along with the Communists, or get no help from us.”
-
-Before the removal, by Truman, of General of the Army Douglas
-MacArthur from all of his commands in the Far East—one of the
-greatest acts of perfidy to go down in American history—few people
-realized that Marshall was not a West Pointer. This, of course, is
-in no way to be held against Marshall, but, during World War I, as
-General Pershing’s aide-de-camp, when Pershing was Chief of Staff, a
-promotion of Marshall to a Generalship was requested of MacArthur by
-Pershing.
-
-MacArthur was willing enough, provided his military record merited
-it. From Walter Trohan’s documented personal files comes information
-that Marshall’s record lacked sufficient time served with troops.
-“MacArthur proposed to remedy this,” says Trohan, “by giving
-him command of the Eighth Regiment at Fort Screven, Ga., one
-of the finest regiments in the Army.” Marshall was moved up from
-lieutenant-colonel to colonel, but his way to a general’s stars
-appeared to be blocked forever when the Inspector General reported
-that under one year of Marshall’s command the Eighth Regiment had
-dropped from “one of the best to one of the worst.” It was mandatory,
-therefore, that MacArthur decline the promotion. Is it any wonder,
-today, that Truman’s action in removing MacArthur from the military
-scene should be most pleasing to the Secretary of Defense?
-
-Of course, this is not the whole story, for Pershing was a
-persevering soldier and had no intention of giving up his
-determination to see Marshall become a general. In 1936, he bypassed
-the Army entirely, and went directly to the White House where he
-succeeded in persuading President Franklin Delano Roosevelt to
-“appoint” Marshall a general. Later, Marshall had proved himself so
-“acceptable” to Roosevelt that, over the heads of “twenty senior
-major generals and fourteen senior brigadier generals, Roosevelt made
-him Chief of Staff.”
-
-I believe that the “tragedy” implied by Walter Trohan concerning
-Marshall lies in the current knowledge that Marshall, despite
-personal bravery, even stoicism, was sadly lacking in vision to match
-it. Thus, he became a willing tool in the hands of the opposition.
-He trusted Russia as an ally and, contrary to the Churchill belief,
-he did not care how much of Europe Stalin took, so long as we sent
-Russia enough tanks and ammunition to crush the German Army. He was
-easy prey to the insidious propaganda put out by Hiss, Acheson,
-Lattimore, Jessup and others who, misguided or otherwise, permitted
-American lives to be sacrificed to make both Europe and Asia “safe
-for Communism.”
-
-We know now what was in the _Wedemeyer Report_. Because it disagreed
-with Marshall’s ideas he, personally, suppressed it. In contrast
-to his decision, Wedemeyer had advocated a strong defense against
-Communism in China, and had gained the Generalissimo’s complete
-approval for American supervision of all aid, financial, military,
-psychological—that would have been forthcoming if the report had been
-approved.
-
-Marshall, as was Pershing, is for an enormous army—for pitting
-manpower, our most precious commodity, against the enemy, in place
-of our superb technological and psychological know-how. General
-MacArthur has shown the absurdity and the tragedy of any such
-commitment on our part. Should Marshall, with Anna Rosenberg at his
-side, be allowed to continue with plans to fight the Asiatic hordes
-thusly, we are, indeed, doomed. May God forbid!
-
-Once again, in retrospect, it appears that American foreign policy
-had been to support the Generalissimo as long as he fought the
-Japanese, but to do nothing that might offend the Communists at any
-time. For the past ten years, or more, our Government seems to have
-had its bets on Communism in China—if not in all Eurasia—to win. The
-facts are against any other conclusion, and we must, again, _assume_
-that Marshall, the President, and the State Department know what they
-are doing. And if they know what they are doing, they must be doing
-it deliberately.
-
-From 1946 through 1948, Marshall ordered destroyed all of the
-reserves of ammunition earmarked for Chiang Kai-shek. These had been
-stored in India and could easily have been transferred to China
-at the end of the war in 1945. Marshall also ordered our military
-mission to refuse further training and aid to the Nationalist armies.
-
-On leaving China, General Marshall was overheard to remark
-enthusiastically, “There is a definite liberal group among the
-Communist Chinese.” This particular group included China’s “Front
-Man,” Chou En-lai, Communist Foreign Minister since October, 1948,
-and his assistant, Chiao Kuan-Hua, spokesman for the Communist
-delegation that was entertained in late 1950 by the United Nations,
-and which was housed and fed at the Hotel Waldorf-Astoria in New York
-City.
-
-It is not difficult to see how Marshall contributed to Chiang’s
-capitulation to the Communists. How can we answer for our refusal to
-accept the 30,000 Chinese Nationalist troops on Formosa, initially
-offered by the Generalissimo to the United Nations for combat in
-Korea or in South China? We accepted units, even token ones, from
-other members of the U.N., but not from Nationalist China, who is
-still an official member. Of course, I know the answer is couched
-in the language of “Peace, peace.” But Stalin will not be provoked
-into full-scale war until Russia is ready for it, and the _danger_ of
-letting Chiang attack south China is no more than a blind.
-
-How can we have aided the Russians more, or brought greater tragedy
-to ourselves than we already have by our own actions?
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER II
-
- _Yenan Interlude_
-
-
-Prior to October, 1949, the capital of Communist China was the two
-thousand-year-old city of Yenan. After the capture of Peking, the
-leaders established grandiose headquarters in that ancient seat of
-emperors, known as “The Pearl of the Orient.” It was in the quaint
-old city of Yenan, however, that the important incubation period
-of these present rulers took place. Here they spent the war years,
-planned their strategy to take over all of China, and cemented their
-contacts with Moscow. From the cold, crude caves of this primitive
-stronghold to the glittering palaces of Peking was a tremendous leap,
-and doubtless it gave the conquering heroes many jolts. How often
-they must have longed for that unique little city, remote and quiet,
-in Shensi Province.
-
-That those early carefree days on the edge of the Gobi Desert did
-not altogether prepare them for their present responsibilities was
-evidenced by the fact that after the Communists occupied Peking
-the municipal government staff there was temporarily retained. The
-new Communist mayor explained, “We have been living in the hills
-(Yenan) and know far less about municipal government than you do.
-Therefore we must learn from you.” Even Mao Tse-tung, whose word is
-law all over China, has already been quoted as saying, “The task of
-reconstruction is apt to be far more difficult than the achievement
-of power.”
-
-Shensi Province boasts one of the best climates in China, dry and
-healthy, with many bright sunshiny days. However, it is frequently
-visited by suffocating dust storms from the desert, giving the
-inhabitants a yellow-powdered coating on the hair, face and
-clothing. The farm lands which were owned formerly by a few of the
-comparatively wealthy peasants were, in 1949, divided into little
-holdings or made into cooperative farms. No all-out effort was made
-to collectivize[1] the land, as in Russia.
-
-The city of Yenan has a population of about fifty thousand, most of
-whom live in caves burrowed into the clay cliffs of three converging
-river valleys. Before the move to Peking, the schools and army
-headquarters of the city were all underground, and only outside the
-city were there many buildings of any size.
-
-One of the most important landmarks was the International Hospital,
-located on the edge of the city in a series of caves. It was called
-“International” because it was supported in part by contributions
-from abroad. The United States had made every effort to be helpful.
-During the war, for the first time in its history, and largely
-through the humanitarianism of the China Theater Commander,
-Lieutenant General Wedemeyer, this hospital was one of the best
-equipped, if not _the best_ equipped, in all of North China. When Mao
-Tse-tung’s little five-year-old daughter fell ill with pneumonia,
-penicillin was flown to her directly from General Wedemeyer’s
-headquarters. Without it she would, almost certainly, have died.
-
-The hospital was Madame Sun Yat-sen’s favorite project There she
-spent many hours, allowing the patients and nurses to bask in the
-radiance of her sacred person. This beguilling “Saint Elizabeth,”
-after impassioned pleading, succeeded in 1945, in getting the United
-States to expedite shipment of increased amounts of medical supplies
-to the hospital from Communist sources. A small contingent of U. S.
-soldiers was stationed in Yenan as a liaison between the Communists
-and the Nationalists. These cartons and crates were opened, as a
-matter of routine inspection by Colonel Ivan D. Yeaton, Communist
-expert and one of the American military observers there. To his
-great consternation, he found that, instead of the urgently needed
-medical supplies, the crates and cartons were filled to bursting
-with Communist propaganda books and leaflets. Going directly to
-Madame Sun, he said, “Why, Madame, I am disappointed and astonished
-to find that you have abused the courtesy extended to you by the
-United States Government. I find that this last shipment, instead of
-containing medical supplies, is filled with nothing but Communist
-propaganda!” Madame Sun blushed prettily and replied with false calm:
-“I am sure that you are not aware of the _many_ kinds of medicine our
-patients need here.” It goes without saying that her supplies were
-cut off, then and there.
-
-Although Communists laid great stress on the good the hospital was
-doing for _all_ Chinese, the conduct and methods of admissions
-smacked of the General Hospital in Moscow. Patients were classified
-in three categories: The Hierarchy of the Communist Party and their
-families took precedence over all; next in line were the Red Army
-officers and soldiers and their families; last, least and very rarely
-came the non-Communist Chinese.
-
-Another distinguished landmark located just outside the city was the
-famous “Prisoner of War School.” Here the captured Japanese soldiers
-were never referred to as “prisoners,” but always as “students,” and
-their compound was referred to as “The School.”
-
-Although, during the war, the Chinese Communist Armies made great
-claims about their successes against the Japanese, their primary
-purpose was to capture Japanese prisoners of war with the idea
-of converting them to Communism. Those who showed promise of
-becoming good subjects promptly were sent to Yenan, given courteous
-treatment and enrolled in the Communist School under Moscow-trained
-instructors. Students who showed little aptitude or whose loyalties
-were questioned were weeded out rapidly and returned to their own
-troops. This last proved to be a diabolical form of punishment, for
-a Japanese soldier is taught never to surrender, but to fight to the
-death. The mere fact that he had allowed himself to be captured and
-was returned to his own troops in good condition was clear evidence
-that he was either a coward or untrustworthy. His end was often the
-guard house or a bullet in the back of his head.
-
-Graduates of the school were dispatched as spies into Manchuria or
-sent back to Japan, there to scatter the red seeds of Communism. This
-was referred to as going to the “Front.” When one friend would say to
-another, “I haven’t seen Yashi for four or five days. Where can he
-be?” the reply invariably was, “Oh, he’s gone to the Front!” Thus the
-Prisoner of War School helped to spread the red gospel throughout the
-Japanese-speaking areas. Its guiding spirit and conductor was Okano,
-now known as Sanzo Nozako, who aspired to be the Stalin of Japan, and
-who is said to be working vigorously to bring all the Japanese into
-the Communist orbit.
-
-The Central Committee of the Chinese Communist Party had appropriated
-for special meetings one of the few well built halls just outside the
-Walled City. On its bare walls were life-size, full length portraits
-of Marx, Engels, Lenin, Stalin, Mao, and Chu Teh, together with a
-large flag bearing the Hammer and Sickle. This hall also served as
-Mao Tse-tung’s city residence. Only on the rarest occasions were
-foreigners ever received here, and at such times the portraits and
-flag were laboriously removed. Surrounding the hall were the best and
-most productive of the local farms, which had been confiscated by the
-Communist Hierarchy for their own use. Here they spent many weekends
-relaxing and enjoying life.
-
-The office where foreigners were habitually received was in a large
-cave. It was decorated with life-size portraits of Stalin, Mao,
-Chu Teh, Churchill, Roosevelt and Generalissimo Chiang Kai-shek
-placed over a grouping of small allied flags. The general atmosphere
-appeared to be one of friendly cooperation based on mutual aims and
-interests. When foreign visitors were present, the Chinese National
-flag was displayed conspicuously over the gates of the compound, as
-a token of good will, and to create the false impression that both
-parties were working in harmony. On all other occasions, and in
-all other places, it was considered extremely bad taste to mention
-Nationalist China, Great Britain or the United States, especially
-with references to any part they were taking in winning the war.
-
-Anyone living in Yenan at that time became aware of the complete
-absence of religious symbols. The ancient temples were occupied by
-Communist families. Religion, as in other Communist countries, had
-gone underground or disappeared. Even the tiny symbolic caves, so
-revered by the Chinese as places of worship, were never used openly.
-Instead, Americans often caught glimpses of Communist soldiers going
-through their ritual when they thought themselves unobserved by
-hostile eyes. Doubtless these little scenes reminded some of the
-better informed GI’s of similar ones enacted in Moscow, where the old
-peasant women braved the wrath of the NKVD and the Stalin Youth to
-worship at the few churches that were allowed to remain open.
-
-The Catholic missionaries, long distrusted by the Communists, had
-been forced into a life of almost complete religious inactivity.
-Their Compound, once a busy center, had become the home of the Lu
-Hsun Art Academy. The old convent had been converted into dormitories
-for students of both sexes. In the Chapel, Communists had torn down
-the painting of Jesus, which was the first object seen on entering,
-and had replaced it with a more than life-size portrait of Stalin.
-The Holy Vessels and Sacred Images lay in rubble on the floor. Only
-the organ was left. Here, the music students practiced American jazz
-and sang “The Internationale.”
-
-[Illustration: _Ancient Pagoda built hundreds of years ago, seen from
-outskirts of Yenan. Caves at right are similar to those used to house
-the Japanese Prisoners of War._]
-
-[Illustration: _“Ballentine Beer Patches” Worn by Marshall’s workers
-in Chungking._]
-
-[Illustration: _The movie actress wife of Mao Tse-tung appears
-pleased with the story she has just told General Marshall, while the
-latter seems to wonder if he got the point._]
-
-[Illustration: _Left to right: Ambassador Patrick J. Hurley, Chairman
-Mao Tse-tung, General Chang, (Generalissimo Chiang Kai-shek’s
-propaganda chief), and General Chu Teh, shown after conference in
-Yenan._]
-
-[Illustration: _Mao has just proposed a welcoming toast to General
-Marshall, and politely listens while others do likewise. The banquet
-was held in Marshall’s honor._]
-
-[Illustration: _Chinese Nationalist and American flags fly between
-banner welcoming Marshall, Nationalist General Chang and Communist
-Chou En-lai. Side banners say “Long Live Peace in the Far East!”_]
-
-[Illustration: _Saturday inspection of Caves in Yenan. Last, on the
-extreme far end to the right, is the cave in which Marshall was
-installed._]
-
-[Illustration: _Crowds greeting Marshall on his arrival in Yenan. At
-extreme left can be seen the Ming Bing with their long spears. Note
-American and Chinese Communist flag on jeep._]
-
-[Illustration: _Left to right: Chairman Mao, Chou En-lai, Marshall,
-General Chang (Nationalist), and Chu Teh. On the right are picked
-troops of the Communist Military Academy._]
-
-[Illustration: _Under Communism man still competes with the lowly
-donkey. Here several are seen carrying fire wood in Yenan._]
-
-[Illustration: _A camel caravan arriving at Yenan from the Gobi
-Desert after passing through the Great Wall. The lead camel wears a
-mask to frighten away evil spirits. (In photo below)—Oxen laden with
-bundles and wares to be sold in the Yenan markets._]
-
-[Illustration: _The Market Place in Yenan, run by non-Communists as
-in the days of their ancestors._]
-
-[Illustration: _Child-mother with twins in improvised home-made
-tandem baby carriage._]
-
-[Illustration: _Caves of the Communists and Red Army seen in the
-distance, sheep grazing beneath them. Small house in foreground
-was used for storage of food._]
-
-Protestants suffered equal indignities. From outlying districts came
-reports of religious oppression and sometimes of atrocities. American
-missionaries, both by word and letter, told of the destruction not
-only of churches but of agricultural and hospital activities which
-had operated for many years to help _all_ Chinese, Communist and
-Nationalist alike.
-
-The population of Yenan was for the most part non-Communist. The
-distinction was not difficult to note for the Communists were easily
-recognized by their dull blue cloth uniforms, their bobbed haired
-women wearing no make-up, and their complete lack of Chinese silks
-and gay colors. The non-Communist majority were allowed to continue
-their usual occupations undisturbed, as long as they minded their
-own affairs. Nearly all the merchants within the Walled City were
-non-Communist, and all gathered daily in the big market, as they had
-done for generations, to display their wares in the open, on boards
-or on the ground. When the Communists wanted anything, they forced
-the merchants to cooperate by handing over a desired commodity, and
-at the Communists’ own price.
-
-Due to the Chinese and Mongolian background of most of the Communist
-leaders, many of them did not, at first, wish their women to play any
-political roles or to appear at public banquets with the men. With
-the growing acceptance of the Russian doctrines, however, all were
-considered equal, and the women worked and ate beside the men. The
-female Communists tried to look as unlike the old fashioned Chinese
-women as possible. Their adopted cause had emancipated them, if
-emancipation meant compelling them to work as hard as the men. In
-Russia, after the Revolution, the women, dressed as men, were allowed
-to load and unload trucks, which the men drove. The rules for the
-masses, however, did not apply to the wives of the leaders. They were
-encouraged to mix freely, to wear better clothes, and to indulge
-in light make-up occasionally. Moreover, it is said that they all
-ate quantities of sunflower seeds in order to obtain the fine, firm
-breasts for which many a Soviet woman is famous!
-
-Tipping was not allowed in the Red realm, for it indicated class
-distinction. As all classes were supposed to be equal under
-Communism, any breach of this regulation was severely punished. In
-Yenan, an American GI tried to express his gratitude to a young
-Communist for helping him make some furniture for his cave by
-offering him a package of American cigarettes. The Chinese boy
-frowned and backed away. “No, thank you,” he said, “I cannot accept
-anything for my services. We are all equal now.” The American
-shrugged slightly and put the cigarettes on a table. A few minutes
-later, when his back was turned, the Chinese boy _and_ the cigarettes
-had disappeared. The following day the American soldier found the
-Communist youth smoking furiously behind a pile of rubbish. He
-learned later that the boy had been spied upon by other Communist
-youths who, out of envy or an excess of Party zeal, had beaten
-him unmercifully. After generations of accepting the traditional
-“cumshaw,” or little token of appreciation, it is well nigh
-impossible to convince a Chinese, Communist or otherwise, that this
-time-honored custom is wrong.
-
-During the war, all American troops stationed in Yenan lived in caves
-on the level nearest the ground. This made for greater convenience
-in getting in and out, in line with the wish of the Chinese
-Communists to show the foreigner every courtesy. The Americans had
-one small house built primarily to shelter the electric generator
-they had brought with them, and here also lived the Commander of
-the Americans. The generator made it possible for the Americans to
-have the only electric light in Yenan. In contrast, the natives and
-families of the Red Armies burned wicks in precious oil or built
-small fires for occasional light. Their rule was to bed down with the
-sun and to arise with the dawn.
-
-One other building allocated to the Americans was used as a
-recreation room, where the GI’s and a highly selected group of
-Chinese Communists played games and had their meals in common. This
-group of Communists assigned to fraternize with the Americans was
-headed by a fellow named Lock Ho, meaning “Old Horse,” whose job was
-to start arguments and to guide the Americans in their thinking. The
-GI’s were never allowed to fraternize with any Chinese who was not
-thoroughly indoctrinated, even at the Saturday night dances. Nurses
-from the International Hospital, students from Yenan University,
-girls and women from the Central Committee of the Chinese Communist
-Party, other students, teachers and members of families of the
-Communists, all were completely propagandized before being permitted,
-or ordered, to attend the dances. In other words, the Americans
-never came in contact with any Chinese who was not fully imbued with
-the tenets of Communism. Be it said to the credit of the Americans,
-the Reds, despite their efforts, were never able to work on the GI’s
-with any degree of success.
-
-On hunting trips, a propaganda expert went along with the Americans,
-but even this could not spoil the superb sport and the pleasure that
-came from shooting an occasional wolf, mountain lion or tiger. The
-pheasant coveys were numerous and the birds huge, making them much
-sought-after additions to the monotonous diet. A man who was a good
-shot, even with an old carbine, would bring down five to ten cocks
-in a day. There were no bird dogs, but when Chu Teh, a fine shot
-himself, and a tireless hunter, accompanied the group, he had his
-bodyguard act as a retriever, a service the American “Imperialists”
-did not have.
-
-The jeeps and trucks of the United States Army were a source of
-wonder and terror to the natives, who were entirely unfamiliar with
-any motor transportation. In this connection, pregnant women proved a
-special headache to the GI’s. When the donkeys or Mongol ponies, on
-which the pregnant ladies were riding, shied away or stood on their
-hind legs at the approach of a vehicle, the ladies naturally fell off
-their mounts screaming and yelling in their high, piercing voices as
-they rolled into the dust or a ditch, their bundles and belongings
-flying helter skelter in all directions. Even when the Americans
-drove slowly or stopped, the havoc wrought was considerable. Many of
-the pregnant riders were indignant and demanded “cumshaw,” or money,
-to compensate for damages to their person and pride, but fortunately
-there were never any serious accidents.
-
-Many things puzzled American soldiers in Yenan. One was how a Chinese
-herdsman, driving dozens of sheep and pigs, could meet and pass,
-on a narrow mountain path, another herdsman equally encumbered.
-Amid ear-splitting squeals, grunts and Chinese swear words, men and
-animals would pass each other without loss or mishap, each going in
-his own direction, with his own animals intact! Surely no American
-could accomplish such a feat.
-
-The GI’s had constant trouble with money. The Communists manipulated
-the exchange any way they wished, but always in their own favor.
-Nobody knew exactly how much money he was worth at any one time.
-Eager to procure all the American dollars and Nationalist currency
-possible to finance trips to the South for their agents, the
-Communists put up their special script in small packages to entice
-the Americans to purchase them for one United States dollar. They
-were counting heavily on the GI’s never-failing interest in a
-“souvenir to take home.”
-
-Every foreigner, on entering Yenan, was thoroughly briefed by the
-Commander of the American Observer Group, who boarded incoming
-planes. This presented a clear indication of Moscow influence. All
-entrants were told never to use the word “coolie,” as it signified
-class consciousness. They were not to mention the words “Reds” or
-“Commies,” as these terms cast aspersions upon the dignity of their
-hosts. All, Communists and non-Communists must be referred to as
-“local people.”
-
-American movies were shown almost nightly out of doors in summer.
-These were so superior to the Chinese or Russian movies that the
-enthusiastic natives would pull down the gates of the Compound if any
-effort was made to keep them out. In the winter, however, the movies
-were shown indoors, and only guests invited by the Chinese Communists
-were allowed to attend. Chu Teh was on hand almost nightly and was a
-particular fan of Betty Hutton’s. He returned eight times to drink in
-her charms as the heroine of the picture “Texas Guinan.”
-
-The only other movies were those supplied by the Chinese Communists.
-Crude and boring, they were largely sent from the Kremlin, and were
-in Russian with no Chinese sub-titles. A leader, in a sing-song
-voice, gave the general idea of the picture, particularly stressing
-the propaganda line it illustrated. The audience, not understanding
-Russian, could hope for only slight amusement.
-
-Even the Hierarchy gave every evidence of preferring American films.
-The lavish background in the Guinan picture made a particularly deep
-impression, as it was such a far cry from the way even the most
-important Chinese and Red Army officers and their families lived. In
-the upper tiers of mud caves, dug into the soft cliffs, they existed
-as primitively as had their ancestors thousands of years before them.
-Little or no furniture cluttered the Reds’ caves, and almost all
-their utensils were wooden bowls and horn cups. After the Americans
-and the British came, the local people salvaged the tin cans thrown
-out by the visitors and had them beaten into plates and dishes,
-copied faithfully from the originals by the blacksmith. Unused to
-comfort, their beds were skins thrown on boards or spread on the mud
-floors—a sharp contrast to the luxury of the sleeping arrangement
-built for Ambassador Hurley when he was in Yenan. This crude approach
-to a truly beautiful Chinese bed was seven feet long, with rope slats
-for a spring, rough unbleached sheets, and a pillow filled with
-bird seed, or millet. It later became the property of the American
-Military Commander and was always greatly admired and coveted by the
-Chinese visitors.
-
-During these years, although life in Yenan was primitive and often
-carefree, the Hierarchy never lost sight of the responsibilities that
-lay ahead of them, and for these they tried to prepare themselves,
-within the limits of their knowledge and capabilities. In 1946,
-contrary to all Chinese Communist teachings, several American
-soldiers were questioned extensively by the Communist leaders on
-matters of capitalist etiquette and protocol. The Americans, amused
-at their roles of male Emily Posts, accepted the challenge in the
-finest American tradition. With grave faces and dressed in their
-best, they gave cocktail parties, movie suppers, and even formal
-sit-down dinners for the education of the distinguished members of
-the Central Committee of the Communist Party. Table manners and light
-conversation were stressed. The pupils were most appreciative of
-these examples of Western culture and refinement and strove in every
-way to learn their lessons and to act accordingly.
-
-Hugely enjoying this fascinating taste of the foreign, they put
-together a so-called Jazz Band and held Saturday night dances that
-were entirely Western in every respect, even to a crude rendition of
-“_The Saint Louis Blues_.” Eager to have everything done in proper
-Western style, the Red leaders provided their teachers with a list
-of Central Committee Communist Party Members, arranged according
-to rank, and insisted that the best State Department protocol be
-observed and practiced rigidly. They were shrewd enough to realize,
-even then, that in conquering new countries, they would have to have
-more than one front man. At that time, Chou En-lai was their only
-polished negotiator. He alone was able to meet foreigners on an equal
-footing and was therefore obliged to be their Minister of Foreign
-Affairs.
-
-The Communists in Yenan, as in all countries in the beginning of
-their transition to slavery, adopted the term “New Democracy”
-and made a great display of its outward form by allowing the
-non-Communist peasants to “vote.” The outcome, of course, was
-previously agreed upon. The balloting was merely a matter of form and
-a means of convincing the people that they still were privileged to
-make their own choice. The literate cast their vote by burning a hole
-in the ballot with a lighted stick of punk, or incense, at the point
-where the name of their candidate appeared. The illiterate dropped
-a pea into a bowl or pitcher, placed in front of a picture of their
-candidate. After the voting was over and the successful candidate
-announced, a huge rally was held and the voter was constrained to
-forget his choice, if unsuccessful, in a frenzy of dancing, shouting
-and singing. After a few hours of this, the tired voter would wend
-his way slowly homeward to his mud cave, or if he were a country man,
-to his ancestral mud hut, often many miles away.
-
-The roads that lead into the Walled City of Yenan are
-two-thousand-year-old trails used by the descendants, both man and
-beast, of those earliest travellers. Both inside and out of the city,
-little has changed. The men driving the camel caravans pad softly
-through the dust, their animals heavily laden with burdens of fur
-and other wares to be marketed in the city. They still practice the
-age-old custom of putting a mask on the lead animal’s head, to drive
-away the evil spirits. Water carriers, after dragging great buckets
-of the muddy liquid from the river, chant their endless “water!
-water!” as they go from cave to cave in the time-honored manner.
-Food vendors, squatting in the dusty lanes cooking bits of lamb and
-pork, roots and herbs over tiny charcoal braziers, cry out shrilly
-to the passers-by, eating occasionally from the pot with their grimy
-fingers. Half-naked babies crawl nearby, whimpering to their mothers,
-who pacify them by giving them sweetened tree bark on which to chew.
-Donkeys, heavily laden, and round Mongolian ponies jostle dog carts
-and belabored oxen. Everywhere, cotton clad coolies, bowed beneath
-huge bales of firewood, coal and charcoal, shuffle along the dusty
-streets. For, alas, although the rickshaw and pedicab or bicycle
-rickshaw has been banned as an occupation beneath the dignity of man,
-the older use of man as a beast of burden has to be accepted. For
-the very poor, there is nothing else to take his place.
-
-This, then, was Yenan in 1946. Now that the Communists have won China
-and moved from the mud caves to the glamorous palaces of Peking, it
-will be interesting to watch their actions.
-
-Will they be able to carry out their plan of communizing the entire
-country? And how long will this take? Will China remain China for
-the Chinese or, for the first time in nearly five thousand years,
-will the once free peoples of this basically democratic country be
-hopelessly enthralled by the yoke of tyranny?
-
-The Chinese have a quality that has distinguished them. This quality
-is patience. The Communists too have patience, but only up to a
-point. Beyond that they use force to accomplish their ends.
-
-There are literally hundreds of languages spoken in China—each
-province speaks a different dialect. Moreover, aside from travel
-between major cities, there is relatively little transportation and
-practically no communication between smaller cities in the interior.
-In view of these facts, is it not possible that the Russians will
-find their progress slow?
-
-Will the Chinese absorb the Soviets as they did the Huns, the Mongols
-and the Tartars? Time alone will give us the answers to these
-questions. Time alone will prove the importance of the incubation
-period spent in Yenan, and whether or not it was worth the sacrifices
-made by the Reds. The die is cast. From it we shall learn what the
-future holds for Asia, for Europe, and perhaps for ourselves as well.
-
-
-FOOTNOTES:
-
-[1] Collectivize means controlled farming, where the peasants are
-only hired hands.
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER III
-
- _Communist Personalities_
-
-
-The Central People’s Government of the Chinese Communist Party is
-the ruling class. It makes the policy, enforces the laws and governs
-with dictatorial power. Mao Tse-tung, at fifty-six, is Chairman and
-Supreme Commander—for the time being at least. Directly responsible
-to him are six Vice-Chairmen among whom is the famous Madame Sun
-Yet-sen. Under these Vice-Chairmen are fifty-six Supreme and fifteen
-Administrative Councilors, twenty Ministries and a political
-Consultative Committee of one hundred and eighty Active Members.
-
-Mao Tse-tung, or Chairman Mao, is a rotund little figure, rather
-dejected looking, with an undistinguished face, topped by a broad
-forehead and a luxuriant crop of black hair. Now installed in Peking,
-he dresses less slovenly than in those earlier days in Yenan when a
-sloppy appearance was considered a badge of honor.
-
-His name, pronounced “Mout-zz-dung,” is easily mispronounced by
-foreigners. Once, during the Japanese war, when Mao was in Chungking
-for a short time, ostensibly to coordinate the Communist forces
-with the Generalissimo’s war effort, he was consistently called
-“Mousy-dung,” by Ambassador Hurley. In conferences, and with the
-best intentions in the world, Hurley would keep saying, “Mr.
-Mousy-dung,” this or that ..., while the Generalissimo would politely
-cover his face with his hand to hide his smile and Mao would blush.
-“Mousy-dung,” in a more common Chinese dialect means “the hole in
-the water closet.”
-
-Earnest and zealous, Mao, a “China for the Chinese” promoter, and
-therefore basically at odds with the Russians, speaks in a distinct,
-sometimes shrill, high-pitched voice. He has a habit of quoting from
-his wide reading. His oratory is forceful but, like Hitler’s, not
-polished. Although brilliantly educated in the Chinese Classics and
-familiar with ancient Greece and Rome through translations of their
-history and literature, up to the time he left Yenan he had never
-learned to speak or understand English. Nearly all foreigners relied
-upon his interpreter when speaking to him. In spite of this, he held
-one group of reporters spellbound for nearly three hours as he talked
-to them in the Foreign Office cave, gesticulating nervously and
-cracking watermelon seeds endlessly between his square white teeth.
-Sometimes his sober countenance and intense preoccupation would amuse
-foreigners. Hurley, after long hours of serious discussions, always
-through an interpreter of course, would, on leaving, bow in sweeping
-Western style and invariably say in English, “Good night, you sad
-little apple you,” to his politely bowing host.
-
-Mao’s childhood was one of unusual drudgery. His father was a
-peasant and a domestic tyrant. Understandably, the boy’s thoughts
-were turned, at an early age, to revolution against authority and
-oppression. He chopped off his pigtail in defiance of the Manchus and
-joined other restless youths who had a hand in the formation of the
-Chinese Communist Party. A few years later, largely through his help,
-this party was joined briefly to the revolutionary party of Dr. Sun
-Yat-sen, which Russia was then aiding.
-
-Years of civil war had taught Mao the technique of guerilla warfare,
-as well as the qualities necessary for leadership. He likens his
-guerilla tactics to the behavior of fleas. “We attack by night,”
-he says, “and wear out strong men.” In 1927 he became President of
-the first Chinese Peasants Union and has never lost his standing
-with it. The ignorant peasants are always impressed not only by his
-rugged and often ruthless qualities, but also by his great learning
-and his ability to write Chinese poetry in the classic style. In the
-early days, he won their further applause by moving freely among the
-people, organizing rickshaw boys into labor unions, and sometimes
-pulling them about in rickshaws himself, while he talked intimately
-of the glories of Communism.
-
-Most of the activities of the Communist Party in the early days were
-carried on in the South, especially around Canton. By 1934, however,
-the Nationalists had gained such power that the Communists were
-forced to leave the Southern province of Kiangsi for the Northern
-caves of Yenan. This, the “Long March,” was a journey of thousands
-of miles, travelled on foot, partly over almost impassable trails
-and some of the highest mountains and largest rivers in Asia. In
-three hundred and sixty-eight days, eighteen major mountain passes
-were crossed, five of them snow-capped, and twenty-four rivers were
-forded. At each stop that was made, the marchers ravaged villages,
-impoverished the well-to-do, and persuaded the poorer peasants to
-join them. They whipped up such a frenzied crusade that their ranks
-were swelled by thousands. So strenuous was the journey, however,
-that at its end only twenty thousand men and women were left, ten
-thousand having fallen by the way. Those who survived were tough,
-one may be sure. A much-quoted legend has grown up about Mao, the
-stalwart leader, which tells how he stumbled along barefooted,
-refusing a wounded soldier’s offer to share a pony’s back. “No,” said
-Mao to the soldier, “your wounds are worse than mine. We shall suffer
-and fight together. That is what makes us comrades.”
-
-Mao’s domestic career, like his political one, has been stormy. His
-first wife, a child, was forced upon him by his parents, at the
-age of fourteen. In his opinion, she does not count, and he never
-mentions her. His second, a school teacher’s daughter, is said to
-have been shot by a Nationalist General. His third was the heroine
-of the “Long March,” and Mao had just cause to be proud of her.
-Tall, frail looking, clever and high spirited, she was sometimes
-argumentative, behavior unheard of in a Chinese women. A female
-soldier, she is said to have received many wounds in battle. She also
-gave birth to a son by Mao during the “Long March,” but when the
-going became too difficult and unsafe she left the child along the
-way with old peasants who were unable to join the marchers.
-
-Alas for this brave wife, when Mao met the beauteous movie actress
-Lang Ping, on arriving in Yenan, she was completely forgotten. He
-was so enraptured with the newcomer that he sent his wife to Moscow,
-normally a reward sought after by any Communist. In this case it was
-only a face-saving gesture, however, and there were rumors that the
-rejected woman contracted tuberculosis and died. Mao’s new marriage
-to Lang Ping caused a flutter of excitement and alarm in Yenan,
-where the Communists knew and admired the courage and fortitude of
-his third wife and where she was held in esteem. News of this flurry
-of unrest reached the Comintern in Moscow, where the practice of
-casually exchanging wives was recognized, if not encouraged. There
-Mao’s conduct was dismissed lightly, and the Chinese Communists were
-told that the matter was to be regarded as “personal, not a Party
-affair.”
-
-During the war, Mao lived happily in a cave in Yenan with wife Number
-Four. Both dressed simply in blue uniforms padded with cotton in the
-winter. In spite of this simplicity they enjoyed more privileges
-than the average Communist. They ate special meals and had extra
-rations of cigarettes, which Mao liked to chain-smoke. He and his
-ex-movie starlet went, occasionally, to Saturday night dances given
-for the Party workers. Here an improvised orchestra struggled with
-Viennese waltzes, known to be Mao’s favorites, along with scattered
-bits of boogie-woogie. Mao also liked Chinese translations of Russian
-songs, but whatever the music, he and his wife swung into action with
-genuine enthusiasm.
-
-On the whole, Mao’s simple life adds to his popularity. A Mao-myth,
-similar to the Stalin-myth, is being built up about him, and by
-similar means. His picture is everywhere. His words are repeated and
-his name is spoken with reverence. In 1937, Mao wrote a letter to
-Earl Browder, head of the Communist Party in the United States, in
-which he said, in part: “We feel that when we achieve victory (in
-China) this victory will be of considerable help to the struggle
-of the American people for liberation.” Mao signed his letter,
-“President of the Chinese Soviet Republic.”
-
-Today, Mao is not only the most influential Communist in China,
-but probably, next to Stalin, the most powerful Red on earth. With
-Kremlin approval, he controls, temporarily more than four hundred
-and sixty million people, which is three times the population of the
-United States and double that of Russia. A typical student of the
-methods of Moscow, in spite of his devotion to Confucius and Plato,
-he has no compunction whatever about condemning thousands to death
-upon suspicion that their loyalties are slipping. Aware of this
-quality in him, Japanese and Korean Communist representatives have
-declared him, “The Symbol of the struggle for emancipation of all
-the peoples of the Orient.” They claim he has attained his position
-of power through his sincere and idealistic solicitude for China’s
-masses and his realism in bringing about reforms. His enemies,
-however, intimate that his “realism” has not excluded any means to
-gain his ends, from walking out of attempted peace conferences to
-assassinations.
-
-The second most important man in Communist China, now that the war
-with the Chinese Nationalists is over, is Chu Teh, pronounced “Ju
-Duh,” Commander-in-Chief of the Chinese Communist Armies. He is
-often called the “Red Heart” of Communist China, as contrasted
-with Mao’s nickname of the “Red Brain.” Number Two in the Hierarchy
-is a plump, jolly, genial-appearing fellow. Looking anything but a
-martinet, he has a broad, disarming smile which shows a wide expanse
-of pink gum. He loves to trot about chucking little children under
-the chin. Born with a gold spoon in his mouth, he was a reckless
-though courageous child who always wanted to be a soldier and kept
-breaking away from an early existence of luxury and high living.
-Rich at the outset, he became even richer through “squeeze” in a
-government financial post. Son of a family of overlords, he rose
-to power and wealth despite his addiction to opiates while still a
-youth. His early use of opium can be laid to his parents. They spread
-the thick, gooey, sweet-smelling stuff on sugar cane and gave it
-to him to suck at night—a common practice of the time to still an
-infant’s nocturnal wails.
-
-Chu Teh had a large family of wives, concubines and children. He was
-past forty when he decided to leave them all and devote his entire
-future and fortune to the revolutionary ideal that burned fanatically
-within him. After squandering part of his wealth and donating the
-rest to the Communist cause, he plundered public funds in order to
-leave his large household well established in a comfortable residence.
-
-Chu was persuaded that the revolution of Dr. Sun Yat-sen in 1911
-had proved to be an utter failure for the masses. In his opinion,
-it lacked the spark of a vigorous ideological revolution, because
-it only substituted one bureaucracy for another. He longed to
-modernize China and to emulate the Marxian heroes of the West. In
-order to further his ambitions and to carry out his ideals, Chu
-put a large foot in the mouth of tradition and, having abandoned
-his family, swashbuckled into Shanghai to meet and mingle with the
-Nationalist revolutionaries. These he joined temporarily, but he
-was always regarded by them with a jaundiced eye. They even went
-so far as to try to kill him one night when a Nationalist officer
-invited him to dinner. Chu scented danger. Realizing at the same
-time that his host was naive and impressionable, he flashed one
-of his face-consuming smiles, followed by a rat-a-tat fire of
-vitriolic conversation damning Communism. He fondled the feminine
-entertainers, recited sensuous love sonnets, and generally made
-himself the life of the party. It worked. His would-be murderous host
-was completely captivated, and Chu escaped without a scratch! In like
-fashion, by such guile and beguiling ways, Chu’s predecessors, under
-Genghis Khan, performed the remarkable feat in the 13th century of
-subjugating the entire country. The old party tricks are still up to
-date!
-
-A practical fellow, with more intestinal fortitude than his habits
-would indicate, Chu picked up his meager belongings a little later on
-and went to Germany to study the Marxian and the Russian Revolutions
-with the Communists there. He moved on up the scale to Moscow,
-matriculated in the Eastern Toilers’ Union, where he studied under
-the best Communist teachers. When he came back to Shanghai, he
-regaled his friends with what he had learned in Germany and Russia.
-“I am determined to make this work in China,” he vowed. To this
-end, he placed great emphasis on guerilla warfare, the people’s
-self-defense corps, to suppress activities of traitors, draw out
-information about the enemy, and guard military secrets. His military
-tactics are the same as those of the Huns of Attila, the Mongols
-of Genghis Khan and the Tartars of Tamerlane. Let the enemy be the
-source of supplies—the enemy being anyone who has anything you want.
-
-As far back as 1927, Earl Browder had been in China helping the
-Communists plant the seeds for the future control of that country.
-They had planned on Chiang Kai-shek playing the role of Kerensky in
-Russia—that of being a temporary leader of the Chinese to be kicked
-out as soon as he had defeated the warlords in southern and central
-China. Chiang, however, was more than a match for them and succeeded
-in blocking their “October Revolution.” He took over, on the death
-of Sun Yat-sen, and ousted all of the Russian advisors and so-called
-“master minds,” who had been posing as friends. The Kremlin whimpered
-and licked its wounds, preparing a relentless revenge.
-
-This was the only serious set-back they encountered until Tito
-deserted and U. S. aid in 1947 saved Greece, Italy and France.
-Their hatred of Chiang, therefore, was deeply rooted and they had
-discredited him and his government in every way prior to their
-take-over of the country when we, the U. S., failed China in 1946 and
-1947.
-
-In 1928, Chu joined forces with Mao, and together they founded the
-first Chinese Soviet Government and the Red Army in Kiangsi Province.
-Chu became Commander-in-Chief of the Red Army in China. With Mao, he
-led the “Long March” to Yenan. Unlike Mao, who will stop at nothing
-to gain his ends, Chu has a Robin Hood quality that makes him a
-friend to the poor, with whom he is ever gaining in popularity. When
-the peasants, for example, complain bitterly that the soldiers are
-stealing from them (a time-honored custom among Asiatic troops),
-he forces them to return the stolen goods. Often, as a matter of
-discipline for other offenses, and as a demonstration to convince
-the peasants of his “sincerity” as to looting, he gathers the entire
-village together and gives the populace the satisfaction of seeing
-the worst looters shot. “No more looting,” he says, shaking a long
-bony finger. “Hereafter, when we need anything we will ‘confiscate’
-it from the rich, our natural enemies, who use cheap and offensive
-tactics against us.”
-
-In spite of an occasional shooting, Chu is popular with his troops
-and has been able to recruit from one to two million guerillas,
-both men and women. One of the latter, a pistol-packing Amazon
-named K’ang K’eching, revived his temporarily restrained love life.
-Dressed as a man, this big-boned siren with platter-sized hands and
-feet, approached him one day and told him she and her companions had
-captured a machine gun. Would he teach her how to use it? He would,
-indeed, for he was delighted with this husky bit of pulchritude. He
-continued to teach her many other guerilla tricks, and from these
-lessons romance flowered. The next year she became Mrs. Chu Teh, and
-the newlyweds set up housekeeping in a cave in Yenan.
-
-Sometimes, on weekends, Chu would leave his cave-office and the
-headaches that beset him there. Sniffing the fresh air as though it
-held an alien fragrance, and baring his buck teeth in a flash grin,
-he would ask in Chinese: “What’s cooking?” This was not idle slang
-with him. When soldiers in the Red Army have been rewarded for some
-deed, they often use the small change they receive to buy a goose
-which they roast and share with their comrades. A standing joke among
-them was that since General Chu could not be rewarded—there being no
-immediate superior to bestow such favor—he could always smell a goose
-and thereby get himself invited to a meal. Among the soldiers he was
-nicknamed “The Cook,” and not alone for his interest in the kitchen.
-Once, disguised as a cook, he was cornered behind Chiang Kai-shek’s
-lines. With revolvers poked into his ribs, he yelled: “Don’t shoot! I
-can cook for you!” The hungry soldiers, touched to their taste buds,
-hesitated for a closer inspection. When he was recognized and the cry
-“kill him!” went up, Chu whipped out a concealed pistol, shot the
-crier, overcame a guard and fled.
-
-Always able to compensate by his keen wits for lack of material,
-he is one of the most talented products of Moscow’s training. He
-has taught his troops to use the old steppe dweller method of
-getting much needed equipment from the enemy. In addition, he has
-successfully augmented his supplies with material obtained from the
-Japanese and the Russians. In spite of Chu’s long association with
-Marx and Moscow, he probably has the interests of China at heart to
-such an extent that the Moscow yoke could cause him to revolt. Chu
-can be likened in the Chinese Communist Hierarchy, to Budnenie in
-the Russian Soviet Army and left in political isolation after his
-usefulness is over. Not a political figure, but entirely military,
-Chu will never compete with Mao.
-
-The third most important man in Communist China, who was the
-Number Two during the war with Japan, is Chou En-lai. His name is
-pronounced “Joe-n-lie.” Like “Mousy-dung,” the name has given rise
-to considerable amusement. Chou himself, unlike Mao, never failed to
-be highly entertained when Ambassador Hurley saluted him with the
-familiar “Hi, Joe!”
-
-The Party’s most polished envoy, Chou is practically the only one
-capable of meeting foreign dignitaries with ease. He is wily, clever
-at negotiation and, like the Property Man of Chinese drama, set the
-stage for the spectacular performance before a world audience of the
-talks with General Marshall in 1945. As “Chief Front Man” and one of
-the directors of foreign propaganda, Chou did such a consummate job
-that Ambassador J. Leighton Stuart told friends, “He presents his
-case better than anyone I have ever encountered, clearly, forcefully,
-urbanely.” Chou was urbane, certainly, for at a large cocktail party
-he charmed the peace negotiators of all three parties, including
-Stuart and Marshall. The tired “diplomats” sought respite in small
-chow and small talk, and for an hour Chou showed himself the polite,
-intelligent, agreeable mixer that he is. Stuart, a scholar and an
-intellectual, told me in Nanking: “Whenever I cannot get a point
-across to Chou, I talk the matter over with some of my students at
-Yenching University. They discuss it with Chou and a solution is
-arrived at immediately.”
-
-It is no secret that the young intelligentsia of the Chinese
-Communist Party were reared and fostered under Stuart’s faithful
-hand, as President of Yenching University, near Peking. He gave his
-best and his all to represent the United States, yet he was an old
-and tired man, and his ideologies and hopes for the Chinese people
-were wrapped up in a belief that the salvation of their country lay
-in Socialism. The only group capable of carrying out these ideals
-was the Chinese Communist Party, which, like its dictator, was
-ready to prostitute Socialism and replace it with its own brand of
-dictatorship.
-
-Following the cheerful little get-togethers, the negotiators would
-return to their arguments, hammer and sickle, and Chou’s charm was
-abruptly turned off. On one or two occasions, however, this charm
-caused the Hierarchy embarrassment. For instance, he was recalled to
-the “Ivory Tower” in Yenan once because Mao felt that he had gone too
-far in his talks with Marshall; that he had appeared to be making
-too many concessions, even though he told a comrade he had not the
-slightest intention of ever living up to any of them. Moreover, he
-seemed to be getting too friendly with Marshall. Chou spent many
-unhappy hours in the Chinese Communist dog house in consequence.
-
-After he confessed, with mock solemnity, to the error of his ways
-and promised “Papa Mao” to be a “good boy,” Chou was sent back to
-Nanking to continue the negotiations. (Mao had to send him back
-anyway, because he was the only man in the Chinese Communist Party at
-the time who could do the job). To prove that he was now “reformed,”
-Chou let out a series of blasts against the United States Government
-that were more violent and vitriolic than any that had yet come from
-Communist Headquarters. Among other things, he accused President
-Truman of fomenting the civil war and of trying to turn China into an
-American Colony.
-
-As an individual, Chou En-lai appears to many by far the most
-personable of all the Chinese Communist leaders. Of medium height, he
-is well built and well groomed. At press interviews he has a nervous
-habit of removing and replacing his black-rimmed glasses as he talks.
-His broad, handsome face is distinguished by thick eyebrows and clear
-cut features. He speaks English in a well-modulated, yet vibrant
-and dramatic voice, undoubtedly cultivated while acting in amateur
-theatricals in college in Tientsin. There he frequently took the
-feminine lead, because of his facial beauty and willowy figure, and
-it was there that he first learned to speak English.
-
-I had several conversations with Chou En-lai in Nanking, always
-speaking through an interpreter. Once, after several hours of
-laborious questions and answers, I said: “Will you ask the General if
-he came through Moscow on his return to China from Europe?” At this,
-Chou threw back his head and laughed heartily. “Heck no,” he said in
-plain American, “I couldn’t speak any Russian then!” I should have
-realized that nearly all Chinese pretend they understand no English,
-hoping they may catch you off guard.
-
-Chou’s grandfather was a high official in the Manchu Dynasty, his
-father a school teacher, and his mother an unusually well-read woman.
-Reared as an intellectual, if not moneyed, aristocrat, he early
-rebelled against the corruption of Chinese politicians. He went to
-France in 1920, and in Paris two years later founded the Chinese
-Youth Group, a branch of the Chinese Communist Party. Returning
-to China, he became a secret organizer of workers in Shanghai and
-Nanking, successfully engineering two revolts. Because of his
-ruthlessness he was called “Executioner,” a title that certainly
-belies his suave appearance.
-
-The Nationalists always considered Chou one of their cleverest
-foes, and they are said to have offered $80,000 for him once, dead
-or alive. During the war he never actually soldiered, although he
-“assumed” the title of “General.” He did help to organize and served
-for a time with the Chinese Red Army in several minor operations
-in the capacity of Chief Political Commissar. With a magnificent
-flair for political education and propaganda, he won his present
-outstanding position as a member of the Politburo, which rules the
-Red-blighted areas wherever they may be. He learned much from Michael
-Borodin, Russian-born Communist, and also from Chiang Kai-shek’s
-one-time Russian advisor, Gallen, who later, as General Bleucher,
-commanded the Russian Far Eastern Army.
-
-Chou is not afraid of work. Toiling late at night, he writes articles
-for the press and prepares lengthy speeches for the radio. He has
-been able to convert many U. S. State Department officials to the
-view that in helping Chiang, we were backing the wrong horse and
-should, instead, have put our money on the Red. From Earl Browder, to
-whom he wrote in 1937, we learn this: “Comrade, do you still remember
-the Chinese comrades who worked with you in China ten years ago?”—in
-1927!
-
-Chou is a true turncoat and has served, back and forth, both the
-Nationalists and the Communist Governments. One job he held during
-the war was liaison officer between the Nationalists and Communists
-in their so-called drive against the Japanese. This was a smoke
-screen, for when Chiang ordered Communist troops to fight the
-Japanese north of the Yangtse River, Chou violently objected. He knew
-that he and the Communists would either starve or be annihilated by
-the Japanese. Thereafter, the Communists pulled their anti-Japanese
-punches, or did not punch at all.
-
-As “Property Man” for the great drama being staged by the Communists,
-Chou always listens to the prompting voice from the wings, the voice
-of his wife. Her’s is a strong, clear voice, the one that converted
-him to Communism, and the one that reminds him constantly of his
-duties. He met her during one of the lowest ebbs of his erratic
-life, in jail. Mrs. Chou is one of the hardest working and most
-enthusiastic and important members of the Party. Not especially
-pretty, she is attractive in a quiet way. In spite of illness (she
-is said to have tuberculosis), she remains politically active and
-influential. Like her husband, she once held a post in Chiang’s
-Government, as Finance Chairman of his New Life Movement.
-
-More favored by Moscow than either Mao, Chu or Chou, is Li Li San,
-whose name is pronounced “Lee Lee Sahn.” Long ago, he and Mao
-quarrelled bitterly, and Li Li San fled to Russia, there to become
-close to the heart of the Comintern. Fifteen years later, this lean
-and hungry-looking agitator returned as Moscow’s appointee to the
-head political role in Manchuria. A rumored cause of the rift with
-Mao was that Li Li was caught heading an anti-Mao secret society,
-with Russian connivance. The angle of their Communism differs. Mao,
-a peasant, supports the farmers, while Li Li San, with his Moscow
-training, favors the city workers.
-
-Probably few men in history have been reported dying or dead over a
-long period of their lives more often than has Li Li San. Nicknamed
-the “Tito of Red China,” when Tito was still dominated by Moscow, his
-career followed closely that of his namesake. After quarreling with
-Mao, he vanished and was presumed dead by his friends. Some years
-later he reappeared, with full Russian support, as a power to be
-reckoned with in the Far Eastern picture.
-
-While in Moscow, Li Li had married a Russian woman and, in the Far
-Eastern University had trained Communist agents and sent them back
-to their homelands as agitators. He maintained a close liaison with
-the Kremlin. As Russia’s war with Japan was nearing an end, Stalin,
-ignoring Li Li’s petty dispute with Mao, sent him, with Marshal
-Malinovsky’s Russian Army of Mongols, into Manchuria six days before
-the Japanese surrendered. His job was to take over this “Prize of
-Asia,” rich in everything the Russians or anybody else needed and
-which no contester for world power could do without.
-
-Another important military personality in the Communist picture
-is Lin Piao, pronounced “Lin Bow.” A great guerilla fighter and a
-natural leader of men, he is a tactical genius who served on Chiang
-Kai-shek’s staff and rose to become President of the Military
-Academy. A little later he left the Nationalists and threw in his lot
-with the Red Army. At twenty-eight he was given command of the First
-Red Army Corps, a unit that is said never to have been defeated. Lin
-Piao was to the Chinese Communist Army what Zukov was to the Russian
-Army, Chief of Staff and a military wizard.
-
-Today, Lin, in his forties, has never gotten over his youthful
-tendency to blush. His agreeable face has slanting eyes that trail
-off into little mice tail wrinkles. He is a sloppy dresser and is
-over-casual in appearance. He has a good singing voice and he and
-Mao, who also fancies himself a singer, often join in duets. After a
-hearty meal when all are feeling warm and rosy from the choicest wine
-of the Communist vineyards, Lin likes to tune up his vocal chords and
-suggest that they sing Mao’s special song, “The Hot Red Pepper.”
-
-This is the story of the Red Pepper who sneers at all the lazy
-vegetables for living such a spineless existence, especially the
-fat and contented cabbage. Finally, the Red Pepper, by means of
-his exceptional personality and cunning ways, incites them all to
-revolution.
-
-The theory, Mao says, is that pepper is loved by all revolutionaries
-from Spain and Mexico to Russia. Lin, like many of the Communist
-leaders, has never been out of China, but because of his excellent
-articles in military magazines his name is familiar in both Japan and
-Russia.
-
-The Hierarchy of the Chinese Communist Party has attached to it
-a liaison officer originally from the Third Internationale, a
-Syrian-American named Dr. Hatem. His Chinese name is Ma Hia-teh,
-pronounced “Ma-High-Da,” and he is always referred to by the
-Chinese as “Dr. Ma.” Fiftyish and fat, he is typically American
-in appearance, resembling more than anything else a successful
-businessman. Born in Buffalo, New York, he was educated in North
-Carolina and in Switzerland where he is said to have received a
-degree in medicine. He has been with the Communists now for about
-twelve years. So completely submerged is he in Communist ideologies,
-he insists he has forgotten his American name.
-
-Proud of having an ardent foreign convert, the Communists still do
-not trust Dr. Hatem politically, although they use him wherever
-they need information from Americans. Because of his ingratiating
-manner, he is a natural to make lonely Americans open up their hearts
-to an old friend from home. He enjoys strutting about among his
-Chinese and foreign friends and bragging about his connections. His
-chief value to the Communists, however, is his ability to evaluate
-American newscasts. In the summer of 1946, he was seen almost daily
-at the fashionable Peking Hotel, immaculately groomed and wearing
-well-tailored clothes. There he spent hours eating and drinking with
-the foreign diplomats and correspondents.
-
-Married to a Chinese movie actress—they all lean in that direction—he
-has a son about three or four years old. Mrs. Ma is a graduate of
-the Lu Hsun Art Academy, formerly the Catholic Church in Yenan, and
-is accustomed to wearing silk and using cosmetics. She finds it
-quite a bore to obey the Communist dictates of “cotton clothes and
-no make-up,” and on several occasions she has been called down for
-making a “spectacle” of herself. Being a Russian-language student and
-much younger than her husband, she was constantly in the company of
-a young Russian doctor who was part of the Soviet liaison group in
-Yenan.
-
-Dr. Ma is a most enthusiastic Communist worker, who has remarked many
-times that he would gladly “kill for the Cause.” He has been known to
-add with emphasis, “And I would just as soon kill Americans as anyone
-else!” He is said, despite his loose tongue, to stand well with
-Moscow because he is such a willing tool.
-
-No panorama of Communist personalities can be complete without the
-name of Madame Sun Yat-sen, famous in Chinese history as the wife
-of the founder of the Revolution that overthrew the Manchu Dynasty.
-Madame Sun, sister of the celebrated Madame Chiang Kai-shek, and the
-slightly less illustrious Madame H. H. Kung, is known widely as “one
-of the famous Soong Sisters.” The middle one of the three—Eiling,
-Chingling and Meiling—Chingling is listed on the new governmental
-roster as Soong Chingling, perhaps to cause less embarrassment to her
-family. She is in charge of the so-called “independent liberals” in
-the Party.
-
-Under her maiden name, this clever conniver has had a somewhat stormy
-career. Claiming that she shuns publicity, she has, nevertheless,
-managed to stay in the limelight a large part of her life. The
-daughter of Charlie Soong, a wealthy merchant who had been reared by
-a missionary and educated in America, she was one of six children and
-is said to have been her mother’s favorite. Chingling has been called
-a pretty child and a not-so-pretty child, so that one might infer
-that her beauty lies rather in her personality than in her face. As
-a young girl, she was on the “dreamy” side, rather shy but highly
-emotional. When she is deeply aroused over a person or a cause, she
-becomes enthusiastic to the point of fanaticism, a quality that has
-proved alarming and distressing to the other members of her family.
-
-Educated in the United States, she adopted the American name of
-“Rosamond,” by which her classmates at Wesleyan College, in Macon,
-Georgia, called her affectionately. Her teachers said that she was
-“very studious, had high ideals and was extremely interested in
-moral and philosophical ideas.” No timid flower, she showed a fiery
-temper when provoked. Very proud of her country and interested in its
-affairs, she often said that she considered the Revolution of 1911
-the “Greatest event of the Twentieth Century.”
-
-“Rosamond’s” English was excellent, and she wrote numerous articles
-for the college paper, one of which read: “When China moves, she
-will move the world. The Revolution has established China in Liberty
-and Equality, those two inalienable rights of the individual....”
-A copy of this was sent to her father, who was so pleased with his
-daughter that he forwarded to her one of the new five barred flags of
-the Republic of China. On receiving it, Chingling shouted with joy,
-climbed up and pulled down the dragon banner from the wall of her
-bedroom, and stomped on it crying, “Down with the dragon! Up with the
-flag of the Republic!”
-
-While still in college, Chingling began a hero worship of Dr. Sun.
-When she returned to China, she shocked everyone by announcing
-her determination to marry him—this, although he was married to a
-woman his own age who had borne him three sons, of whom Dr. Sun Fo
-undoubtedly is the best known. Subsequently she became his secretary
-and, with skill and determination, aided by her youth and beauty, she
-finally overcame all obstacles and, in 1915, became the second Madame
-Sun Yet-sen. Basking in all the excitement and publicity she so
-“abhorred,” she wrote to a classmate back at Wesleyan, “Being married
-to Dr. Sun is just like going to school all over again, only there
-are no examinations to take!”
-
-The marriage lasted until Dr. Sun’s death, in 1925. They had the
-usual ups and downs, but she reported to her friends from time to
-time that “it never lacks excitement.” The Revolution inspired by
-her husband, Communistic in its original structure, shifted back and
-forth from reactionary to conservative to reactionary.
-
-On the death of Dr. Sun, the reins of the revolution were put
-into the hands of Madame Sun’s brother-in-law, Chiang Kai-shek.
-Never in harmony, politically or emotionally, Chiang and Mme. Sun
-had had many violent disagreements. Finally, in 1927, two years
-after her husband’s death, she confirmed her leftist sympathy by
-going to Moscow. There she remained for three years, studying
-Communist doctrines in the World Anti-Imperialist League. In
-self-justification, she claimed that the Nationalist Government had
-distorted the meaning of her husband’s original ideas, that they had
-always been similar to those of the Russian Revolution.
-
-Again, in 1930, Mme. Sun, the former Soong Chingling, burst into
-print in an angry tirade against the Generalissimo. On January 22nd
-of that year, she sent a cable to the Anti-Imperialist League in
-Berlin, saying: “Reactionary forces in the Nationalist Government
-are combining with the Imperialists in brutal repression against the
-Chinese masses. They have degenerated into Imperialist tools and
-attempted to provoke war with Russia.”
-
-Feeling ever closer to the Communists and farther, ideologically,
-from the rest of her family, she chose the anniversary of the
-eightieth birthday of her predecessor, the first Madame Sun, to
-take her stand, in 1946, in favor of the Chinese Communists and
-the Soviets. Her stinging speech was headlined in every Chinese
-newspaper and many abroad. There could be no doubt now that she was
-a full-fledged militant Communist, willing to use the powers of her
-brilliant mind and persuasive personality to the utmost.
-
-Today, nearing sixty, she is third Vice-Chairman of the Communist
-Party, and her influence is, perhaps, the strongest and most forceful
-of any women member, so global are her contacts. Soon after her
-“elevation” to the third Vice-Chairman of the Chinese Communist Party
-early in 1950, she said: “China will continue to follow the policy
-of leaning to one side, to the side led by the great Soviet Union
-under the leadership of the mighty Stalin: the side of peace and
-construction.”
-
-A current rumor, despite denials, is to the effect that Mme. Sun may
-be having another change of ideas and ideals and is, therefore, not
-in the good graces of General Mao who, like his mentors, Stalin and
-Genghis Khan, hates a turncoat.
-
-In appearance, Madame Sun is not unattractive. She dresses simply,
-preferring plain silks without the elaborate trimmings so dearly
-loved by her sisters. She wears her neat, black hair parted in the
-center and drawn back smoothly from her face to form a large, soft
-“bun” at the nape of her neck. She speaks in a quiet voice and says
-exactly what she thinks.
-
-At the Shanghai Opera one evening in 1946, Madame Wei Tao-ming, wife
-of the then Chinese Ambassador to the United States, was seated just
-behind her. Madame Sun, who was flanked on either side by well-known
-Chinese and American Communists, turned around at each intermission
-to chat with Madame Wei, who had been one of the youngest and most
-devout revolutionaries. I learned the subject of the conversations
-that evening when we returned to Madame Wei’s temporary home in the
-Avenue Lafayette. Livid with rage, Madame Wei said to me:
-
-“Do you know what she kept saying to me, over and over again?”
-
-Naturally I could not have known and said as much. Madame Wei
-continued:
-
-“She berated me bitterly for not being nicer to the Communists! Me,
-of all people, who was one of the first and hardest working fighters
-in her husband’s own revolution! She said, ‘You’re going to regret it
-one day, if you do not change your attitude. They are in the driver’s
-seat, and they are going to stay there’!”
-
-I had never seen Madame Wei so beside herself with anger. This
-was just four years before it was generally acknowledged that
-the Communists were in full authority, and the period of tenure
-is a matter of conjecture. Madame Sun, apparently, had seen the
-handwriting on the wall and had interpreted it correctly.
-
- * * * * *
-
-While there are many other Communist personalities aside from those
-discussed in the foregoing pages, to mention them all would do no
-service to this story. Those included are the ones whose names appear
-most frequently in the press and on the radio. To know them and their
-ways is to know the spirit and the methods of the unholy movement to
-which they subscribe.
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER IV
-
- _Communism’s Forebears_
-
-
-Who are these people who have conquered most of Europe and Asia and
-openly flaunt their determination to conquer the world? Where did
-they come from? How have they been able to enslave approximately nine
-hundred million people? Do they really have the secrets of the A and
-H bombs? Will they use them to fulfill their diabolical schemes? And
-when?
-
-The answers to these questions are vital to all people—to every
-American, man, woman and child. Not even in the days of Genghis
-Khan was there such a tremendous upheaval over so vast an area of
-the earth’s surface, as the one we are witnessing, as we pass the
-half-way mark of the Twentieth Century.
-
-Long before Moses was found in the bullrushes, the people who lived
-in the Northern steppe lands sucked hardship from their mothers’
-breasts and grew into sturdy savages, mortally feared by their
-neighbors. They were Asiatics, that is, they belonged to the Yellow
-Race, the best known tribes of which are the Huns, the Mongols and
-the Tartars. Today, “Mongol” is the common name given to people
-comprising nearly all of Central Asia. Destiny gave a strange role to
-these fearless nomads. Blood-thirsty and aggressive, time and again
-they burst the seams of their homelands and overran most of Europe
-and Asia. Each time they rose to world conquest, the pattern followed
-was the same. Guided by the genius of a merciless and brilliant
-individual, the dominant tribe or clan ran the full gamut from
-tribal communism, necessary in the early days for self-preservation
-and mutual benefit, to communistic imperialism. As the tribes grew
-larger and more powerful, and the value of the spoils increased
-enormously, several leaders struggled for complete control. This
-struggle ended in a period of despotic dictatorship, when one man
-gained supreme power and wielded it ruthlessly. The period of
-oppression lasted, at various times in the past, anywhere from a
-few years to a few hundred years, depending upon the foresight and
-strategy of the rulers. Invariably, the dictatorship disintegrated,
-and the empires fell into dissolution and decline, followed by
-desolation and chaos. The method by which each nomad chieftain rose
-to power was strikingly similar. He would consistently strengthen his
-armies and trap his victims by guile, trickery, infiltration, and
-every known deceit.
-
-Succession to the leadership of the clan, tribe or nation was not
-necessarily hereditary. It could pass from father to son or outside
-the family, just as in the Soviet Hierarchy today succession
-passes from Party member to Party member. Then, as now, it was the
-strongest physically, and the cunningest mentally, who always assumed
-leadership.
-
-These primitive conquerors had several great advantages over their
-more civilized neighbors. One was their extraordinary physical
-stamina. The weeding out of the weak began practically at birth.
-Children, weaned from mother’s milk, were fed on mare’s milk for a
-few years and then were left to care for themselves as best they
-could.
-
-As clans gathered around the open fires, where all the food was
-cooked in huge pots, the strongest men ate first; the aged and women
-next; and the children were left to fight over the bones and scraps.
-Food was abundant in the spring when mutton, game and fish were
-available. In the early winter the hordes lived largely on millet,
-and fermented mare’s milk. The latter had a high alcoholic content
-and was quite “heady” for the younger children. By the end of the
-winter, the clansmen were reduced to foraging and making raids on the
-herds of other tribes. The old and weak were left to perish. Only the
-hardiest survived.
-
-Another great advantage of the militant nomads over their victims
-was their ability to ride the horse. Everywhere else in the ancient
-world, this animal was used only to draw the heavy war chariots.
-The Mongols, fearing nothing, mastered the horse and became expert
-cavalrymen. The resulting mobility was a tremendous asset in warfare.
-Without the horse, the Mongols would never have been able to conquer
-such vast territories. Learning to ride as children of three or four,
-they were superb horsemen in their early manhood and hunted with
-consummate skill. When they appeared upon the horizon in a cloud of
-dust and with a clatter of hooves, it was only a matter of minutes
-before each dropped down like an eagle upon his prey.
-
-Of even more strategic importance was their conception of the fifth
-column. Poor always, in comparison with their neighbors, whose lands
-and goods they coveted, they—like their Russian descendants—developed
-a technique of boring from within. Ahead of them were sent
-humble-looking barterers or beggars, who easily bribed and cajoled
-their way inside the walls of a city. At the critical moment, the
-unfortunate citizens would find their gates open and hordes of wild
-tribesmen bursting in upon them with bloodcurdling yells.
-
-Whether at home or in the field, these nomads lived in yurts, or
-domelike tents, made of felt and mounted on wooden carts, drawn by
-oxen. They spent most of their days on horseback, hunting, fishing
-and constantly fighting among themselves and with neighboring clans.
-Often they remained in the saddle for days, eating little or no food.
-
-Between each major conquest, there were long periods when fighting
-was confined to the steppe lands. It was only when an outstanding
-genius appeared that they attempted the invasion of the more
-civilized countries—Europe, China or the Near East—which, throughout
-the ages, were constantly on the defensive against them.
-
-One of the first of these tribes that grew to world power was led
-by Attila the Hun, in the Fifth Century. Slashing and murdering his
-way through Europe, he terrorized the entire continent and captured
-the greatest city of antiquity, Rome. Earlier, when Rome fell to the
-Goths, the citizens though that surely the end of the world had come.
-It was not until the Huns attacked, however, that they felt the full
-fury of Asiatic destruction and torture.
-
-Attila was a typical Mongol of his day. Shaggy-headed, dirty and
-disheveled, his gorilla-like appearance evoked as much terror as if
-he had been a wild animal. With as little regard for human suffering
-as for the priceless treasures of Rome, he was lustful only for
-power, wine and women. He is said to have kept a huge harem, and,
-like his followers, to have left countless children by captured
-slaves all over Europe and Asia. Because of his merciless brutality,
-plundering and rape, he was called by his victims, “The Scourge of
-God.”
-
-In 451 A. D., Attila was finally defeated, and while celebrating the
-addition of a new beauty to his harem, he died. He had taken from the
-world, by force, everything he wanted, because he knew no other way
-to get it. His vast and powerful empire collapsed like a house of
-cards and fell into utter ruin.
-
-Approximately seven hundred years later came the most brilliant, the
-most destructive, and the most incredible of all the forerunners of
-Communism, Genghis Khan. He conquered not only the major part of
-Europe and almost all of Northern Asia, but also established powerful
-dynasties in Persia and China.
-
-Born in 1162 A. D., Genghis Khan, at thirteen, succeeded his
-father as Chief of the Yakka Mongols. A robust lad, he was tall
-and broad-shouldered. His eyes set far apart, unlike those of the
-Mongols, did not slant and were a curious shade of green. He had high
-cheekbones and a sloping forehead beneath abundant red hair, which he
-wore in long braids down his back. His was a striking personality. He
-was as different from the other members of his horde in appearance as
-he was in mentality.
-
-In his early years, Genghis wore the simple clothing of his
-tribesmen, consisting of skins sewn together with sinews. Frequently
-he greased his body to keep out the cold and moisture when it was
-necessary to sleep in the snow. He ate raw meat, and drank mare’s
-milk and sometimes blood which he let from the veins of his horses’
-legs. Mentally the equal of any Caucasian, he undoubtedly had
-European blood in his veins. Perhaps that of a Princess, who knows?
-
-Although this despot had an ungovernable temper and a wrath that
-could terrorize the strongest, he also had the capacity to make firm
-and lasting friends and loyal followers. He spoke thoughtfully and
-deliberately and is said to have remarked many times, “Monasteries
-and Temples breed mildness of character, but it is only the fierce
-and warlike who dominate mankind.” His eloquence could spellbind the
-masses.
-
-He was an expert with the bow and arrow. His physical strength
-made him the leader of the wrestlers. He had been known to pick up
-an opponent, hold him high above his head, then break his back as
-though it were a bamboo reed! He enjoyed wrestling matches only when
-they rivaled the Roman gladiators, when the bones of the weaker
-adversaries were broken and crushed. He despised weakness of any
-kind, for he himself was a match for any man, and he had never been
-bested at any sport. Born of a race unwashed and illiterate, he
-raised his tribe of unknown barbarians to a position of world renown.
-Believing firmly that the Mongols were the natural masters of the
-world, he also was convinced that he had been chosen by Destiny
-to lead and control them. Thus impelled, this amazing barbarian,
-starting with only a tribe of wild nomads, finally conquered
-everything from Armenia to Korea, and from Tibet to the Volga River.
-
-After Genghis Khan had subdued all of China, he settled down and
-developed into a typical oriental potentate. He lived in splendor
-on the present site of Peking, a far cry from his earlier primitive
-tent on the Gobi desert. Just so, in 1949, Mao Tse-tung sprang from
-the mud caves of Yenan to the palaces of Peking as China’s Number One
-dictator. Here, in this ancient city, Genghis, as Emperor, surrounded
-himself with courtiers and officials, as well as with wives,
-concubines and slaves.
-
-He held high court and worked on affairs of state in a high pavilion
-of white felt, lined with treasured silk. Here also he entertained
-his friends and kept a silver table on which sat vessels of fermented
-mare’s milk and bowls of meat and fruit for their pleasure. Dressed
-in a lavishly embroidered robe and wearing a long and flaming beard,
-he sat at state functions on a dais at the far end of the pavilion.
-With him on a low bench sat Bourtai, his favorite wife. She was the
-real love of his life, and he claimed only the children born by her
-as his own. The Empress was small and dainty, with beautiful features
-and long hair braided with jewels and heavy coins. She was the mother
-of three sons who were destined to rule at a later period a domain
-larger than Rome’s. Other wives and concubines grouped themselves at
-his left, on lower platforms. His nobles sat on benches around the
-walls of the building, wearing long coats, bound around with enormous
-bright-colored silken girdles, and large, uptilted felt hats. In the
-center of the pavilion glowed a great fire made of thorns and dung.
-There was utter silence when Genghis spoke. His word was absolute
-law. It is said, “Any who disobeyed his word was like a stone dropped
-into deep water, or as an arrow among the reeds.”
-
-Genghis Khan was almost as superstitious as he was brilliant.
-Believing that the character of every animal was in its heart, he
-hunted lions and tigers with great zest, preferring to capture them
-alive. He tore them open with his bare hands, pulled out the heart,
-and ate it while it was still throbbing. Convinced that this gave him
-the courage of a savage beast, he compelled his men to follow his
-example.
-
-A military genius, he is known as the greatest guerilla fighter in
-history, but his real life work was the molding together of his
-vast hordes into a disciplined, well equipped, highly trained, and
-completely organized army. He used the forced labor of subjugated
-people—a significant parallel to the present day methods of Stalin,
-who, in order to increase the efficiency of his armies, drafted
-into them German scientists, artisans and technicians, as well as
-thousands of humbler laborers.
-
-Genghis acquired, ultimately, over four hundred thousand warriors,
-countless elephant and camel trains loaded with the wealth of
-Croesus, and multitudes of armed slaves. “Unmatched in human valor,”
-it is said, “his hordes overcame the terrors of barren wastes, of
-mountains and seas, the severities of climate and the ravages of
-famine and pestilence. No dangers could appall them, no prayer for
-mercy could move them.”
-
-Genghis Khan was the symbol of a new power in history. The ability of
-one man to alter human civilization began with him and ended with his
-grandson Kublai Khan, when the Mongol empires began to crack. It did
-not reappear again until the rise of Stalin to power.
-
-The vast empires that Genghis established, with their accompanying
-devastation, was not all that he achieved. Had this been so, he would
-have been merely another Attila destroying with little or no definite
-purpose. His genius for organization and his clever statesmanship
-made him the model of kings, although he could not read or write when
-he drew up the incomparable “Yassa,” or code of conduct. This curious
-document, not unlike the dictates of Stalin, had three main purposes:
-to ensure absolute obedience to Genghis Khan; to bind together all
-the nomad clans for the purpose of making war; and to punish swiftly
-and mercilessly, anyone who violated the law, civil, military or
-political. With the “Yassa,” he and his heirs ruled their empires
-for three generations. The lash of its ruthless authority held it
-together.
-
-Genghis died in 1227 A. D., leaving the greatest empires and the
-most destructive armies the world had ever known to that day. Not
-until the advent of the Tartars, a few centuries later, did another
-Asiatic tribe rise to world power. Led by fearless Tamerlane, they
-also laid waste everything in their path, in the savage manner of
-their predecessors. Once again the pattern was repeated. It is
-characteristic of the empires built by the steppe nomads that they
-were not the result of gradual development and expansion, but the
-product of a rapid growth under the leadership of a single powerful
-man. These men all seem to have had an evil genius for political
-intrigue, for exacting fanatical loyalty among their followers, and
-for devising ways to conquer many times their own numbers.
-
-The aim of each of these Asiatic conquerors was to control the vast
-area of the world from the Pacific Ocean to Central Europe. They
-planned the overthrow, by force and violence, if need be, of all
-other governments and peoples in their path. Czarist Russia, in
-1905, achieved the geographical empires of Genghis Khan, actually
-peopled by descendants of the same racial elements. Had they not been
-defeated subsequently by the Japanese, the Czars and their successors
-probably would have controlled all of China. In this new grouping
-of mankind, however, it was the half-Tartar Russians and not the
-Mongols, who were the dominant military factor. Today, the ruling
-power comes from Moscow, and not from the Mongolian East, except for
-the infusion of Chinese blood that has resulted from seven hundred
-years of constant conflict with the Celestial Empire.
-
-With the discovery of America and her tremendous natural resources,
-the lust for world dominion has increased. Today, Stalin has
-ambitions for global mastery. His first tools of conquest are the
-Communists in every country. In February, 1947, as the Communist
-Convention in London, delegates from thirty-two countries met
-to reaffirm their pledges to support the Communist Party. These
-Communists are not members of a political party in the American
-sense; they are sinister and potentially powerful weapons of the
-Soviet Government.
-
-Everywhere today, the “New Democracy,” or early Communism, has
-followed the pattern of the rise of each Asiatic despot. It repeated
-itself in Moscow in the early Twenties at the death of Lenin, when
-Stalin and Trotsky struggled for power. China, today, is passing from
-the first stage, the period of self-denial, of sharing the wealth, of
-submitting to rigid discipline and purification for “The Cause”—the
-Sackcloth and Ashes stage. The Chinese Communists are beginning to
-experience the progressive steps of disillusionment, apprehension and
-abject terror, as was the lot of millions of Russian peasants during
-the infamous Thirties.
-
-The great and overpowering tragedy of Communism is that at no stage
-or time has it ever been the shining Utopia that hypnotizes the
-credulous common man and woman and some of the dreamers in high
-places in our own government. It would appear that neither Marx
-nor Engels understood human psychology or analyzed intelligently
-the lessons of history, for Socialism, in suppressing individual
-initiative, inevitably leads to I-Don’t-Care-ism. An economy based on
-share-and-share-alike, without regard to individual effort, failed in
-Russia because it put a premium on mediocrity and deprived man of the
-fruits of his own labor. It had to be replaced with “Stakhanovitism,”
-or piece work, which the American labor unions have fought constantly
-in their march toward Socialism. The Russians found that the only
-way to make men exert themselves without the incentive of reward
-was through fear of punishment. Thus Socialism has to be enforced by
-police methods to be at all effective. What is this but dictatorship?
-Socialism, Communism, Stateism—these can no more be separated from
-each other than can the component parts of homogenized milk.
-
-Communist leaders, motivated by the promise of power, insist that
-world revolution is inevitable. The Chinese Communists, for many
-years, repeated an ancient legend. They said: “The Mongols still are
-waiting in their felt tents, for the issue to be decided. They are
-gathering around their yurt fires and chanting together: ‘When that
-which is harder than rock and stronger than the storm winds shall
-fail, the Empires of the North Court and the Empires of the South
-Court shall cease to be; when the White Tsar is no more, and the Son
-of Heaven has vanished, then the campfires of Genghis Khan will be
-seen again, and his empire shall stretch over all the earth’.” That
-prophesy is being fulfilled.
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER V
-
- _Communist Propaganda_
-
-
-Propaganda, thanks to a better understanding of mass psychology,
-has become in the past few years almost an exact science as well as
-an art In the hands of the Communists it is a powerful weapon, so
-subtle that, as in shadow boxing, one cannot judge the exact position
-of the enemy. With wily cleverness, it has perverted the meanings
-of cherished words, so that great national masses of people are no
-longer aware of their rightful connotations.
-
-We, in the United States, for instance, think of Democracy as the
-dictionary defines it: “Government in which the supreme power
-is retained by the people.” The Communists have distorted this
-by adopting the term “New Democracy,” to represent a Communist
-controlled state, that is, a dictatorship.
-
-Freedom, a beautiful word, has also been distorted. In a Western
-democracy, it means “liberation from slavery,” that is, the
-opportunity to work, live and play where, when and how one chooses,
-in open competition. In a Communist State, none of these things
-is possible. There can be no freedom where full regimentation is
-required. The Soviet’s claim of freeing the peasants from onerous
-landlords and the workers from grasping capitalists is only a blind.
-Any poor Chinese on the street soon sadly learns that these are being
-replaced by more oppressive masters, the Soviet Commissars.
-
-Security is another wonderful word, and the Communists have been
-quick to realize its universal appeal. However, they use it in a
-purely economic sense, deliberately ignoring any but material values.
-Their type of security can be promised only at the price of personal
-freedom. It is already in operation in all penitentiaries, where the
-life-term convict is fed, clothed, cared for when ill, sheltered,
-entertained and protected from the harsh conditions of economic
-competition. He need not worry about any of these things. Yet it is
-a generally accepted fact that he would gladly and immediately trade
-all of the benefits he receives from his prison incarceration for the
-one little matter of Freedom.
-
-[Illustration: _The Chinese Commissar, in the footsteps of his
-Russian counterpart, reads to his military unit the daily propaganda
-bulletin._]
-
-[Illustration: _Communist Propaganda Poster captions_: HAPPY ARE
-THOSE WHO WORK FOR THE PEOPLE!]
-
-[Illustration: DRAW WATER AGAINST THE DROUGHT! _Another propaganda
-poster._]
-
-[Illustration: _Non-Communists looking at bulletin reporting expected
-visit of General Marshall to Yenan. Bulletin is put out by Communist
-Cultural Committee for Mass Education._]
-
-[Illustration: _Communist propaganda poster_: PRODUCE FOR THE PEOPLE!]
-
-[Illustration: _Communist propaganda picture showing how to_ RESCUE
-THE WOUNDED!]
-
-Besides twisting the meaning of words, the Communists have subtly
-changed long accepted human values and relationships. By distortion
-of Truth, and constant repetition of the Party Line, they gradually
-paralyze all individual thinking and destroy the will to resist.
-Russian propaganda is far more effective than was the German, and
-their Chinese henchmen have had to modify it slightly to adapt it for
-use in their country. By false promises, intimidation and persuasion,
-the Communists lulled the weakened opposition and made the conquest
-of China easier. When necessary, they never hesitated to use terror
-and brutality. By these two means they have established a vast web of
-control over the entire land of nearly five hundred million people.
-
-The Chinese Communists have found it expedient to have two types of
-propaganda: one which is directed at foreigners and follows strictly
-the Moscow line; the other maintained for domestic consumption. The
-home propaganda concentrates on Chinese affairs and plays down the
-foreign and international angles. Slogans, or catch phrases, are
-evident everywhere, on billboards, in handbills, on posters, in the
-press and on the air channels. In this way, the slogans are repeated
-over and over again, until everyone becomes thoroughly familiar with
-them. Throughout China are heard the shouts of the victors—SERVE THE
-PEOPLE! PRODUCE FOR THE PEOPLE! RESCUE THE WOUNDED! BEAR SONS FOR THE
-PEOPLE! The latter is one of the most surprising in a land that has
-an annual death rate of a million from starvation and is presently
-suffering from the worst famine in years!
-
-The slogans are often illustrated and used as picture posters.
-Gay and colorful, they frequently show a prosperous looking group
-standing or sitting before an enormous basket overflowing with
-luscious fruits and vegetables. The caption: HAPPY ARE THOSE WHO
-WORK FOR THE PEOPLE! Billboards and handbills in villages and towns
-are, of necessity, simple and elementary, while in Shanghai and
-other large cities they are more elaborate and sometimes quite
-sophisticated.
-
-As in Germany before the war, and in Russia today, the Chinese
-concentrate on the children. These are often separated from their
-families when they are very young and sent to special schools away
-from their homes. The Chinese Communists, like the Soviets, are
-making every effort to destroy family life and ties, since family
-loyalty competes with their training program. The first and only
-loyalty must be to the State. In some schools, youngsters have been
-given new textbooks which begin with the verse:
-
-“I do not love my Mama. I do not love my Papa. I love only my Country
-and Mao Tse-tung.” Other books show pictures of Generalissimo Chiang
-Kai-shek and other Nationalist leaders and characterize them as
-enemies of the State who are “to be killed on sight.”
-
-Children, otherwise well brought up and, prior to the new schooling,
-devoted to their families, return to their homes and face their
-parents with: “We don’t love you any more. We are leaving home and
-will fight the Nationalists ourselves, wherever we find them!”
-
-Some of the propaganda is directed against foreigners, especially
-Americans. The children are taught to repeat little songs in which
-Americans are called “greedy and vicious capitalists,” and they are
-shown cartoons depicting Americans as two-headed pigs being kicked
-out of China.
-
-The effect of such systematic mind-poisoning is shown in an incident
-that happened in North China just before the Communists took over.
-An American on a business trip watched a Chinese woman, carrying a
-baby and a large bundle, attempt to cross a narrow bridge over a
-little river. A tiny girl, barely old enough to walk, clung to the
-mother’s skirts. The planking of the bridge was wobbly and narrow.
-Realizing they could not all cross at once, the woman loosened the
-child’s hands and told her: “Wait there and I’ll come back for you.”
-Then, with the bundle and baby, she crossed the poorly constructed
-span. The American, trying to be a good Samaritan, went toward the
-stranded little girl to offer to take her across. At his approach
-she screamed in terror and ran from him. Catching up with her, he
-talked to her in a quiet voice for some minutes. Soon the youngster
-dried her tears, accepted the man’s arms, and was carried to safety.
-The mother turning to go back for the child, cried out in alarm at
-seeing her in the arms of the American. With the realization that the
-man meant no harm, she appeared amazed at his courtesy.
-
-Among the near illiterate, speeches are the most effective means of
-propaganda, and the Chinese Red Armies have large doses of these
-inflicted upon them. The soldiers, following the example of their
-Russian comrades, are briefed on when to clap and when to cheer. Like
-any college football crowd, they dutifully follow the cheer leaders.
-
-The Communists are especially proud of their so-called “Educational
-Program” for soldiers, and they claim that thirty per cent of the
-time allotted to military training is devoted to “cultural” and
-political work. As a result of attendance at daily classes, over
-eighty per cent of the troops are reported able to read elementary
-Chinese characters, giving them enough background to understand
-simplified Communist newspapers. These “newspapers” are filled with
-news strictly censored by the leaders, and the characters learned
-in school are those that enable them to read only what the posters
-and textbooks say. No effort is wasted on superfluous, non-political
-knowledge.
-
-Bestowing tides as a reward is another Moscow-inspired incentive for
-the soldiers, as well as for the illiterate populace. This device
-is also used to encourage labor production and to throw a smoke
-screen over exploitation. Labor “Heroes” and “Heroines” are greatly
-admired in all Red-blighted areas, and any Communist who studies and
-works hard has a chance to be thus honored and to obtain the coveted
-material reward or special privilege that accompanies the title.
-
-Russian propaganda, when modified for the Chinese, is slanted so
-that it may not offend them too greatly while they are still being
-taken over, that is, during the transition period of persuasion and
-deception. Shortly after the capture of Tientsin, an enormous picture
-of Stalin appeared beside that of Mao Tse-tung in Min Yuan Park.
-The people milling around in great throngs stared up at it, some in
-wonderment. One of them finally remarked, “Who is that other man?
-He is not Chinese, he is a foreigner.” In order to keep the surface
-smooth at first and to cause no undue alarm or suspicion among the
-people, the next day Mao hung alone.
-
-The capture of Tientsin and Peking was accomplished with
-comparatively little fighting except on the outskirts of both cities.
-The plans for taking Peking had been well thought out. Secret agents,
-for years, had been “persuading” the people and softening up the
-Nationalist troops. The actual capture was cunningly timed. The
-Chinese New Year was chosen, with due respect to superstition, by the
-incoming lords of the land. They allowed the people to spend three
-days making their customary friendly calls upon each other, in the
-ancient manner, and settling up their bills and accounts. Farmers
-poured into the cities with supplies of meat and vegetables, and
-the Communists bided their time while the citizenry, ate, drank and
-made merry. In the Chinese calendar 1949 was the Year of the Rat, and
-1950 ushered in the Year of the Cow. Time-honored superstition has it
-that when, in the passage of years, the tail of the Rat touches the
-horn of the Cow, times will be good, luck will change and the future
-will be successful. The Chinese were all congratulating themselves
-over their coming good year when the Communists, after waiting for
-the psychological moment, marched their armies in and took over the
-ancient capital.
-
-The new masters gave the populace various choices of “surrender”
-terms, although they did not use the expression “surrendering.”
-First, the vanquished were politely invited to “Come out and join us,
-for we are all brothers now.” This invitation was called the “Peking
-way.” When anyone showed reluctance to accept, the “Tientsin way” was
-tried. This method involved pressure, first psychological, then if
-that failed, material, and finally if there was still any hesitation,
-physical, in the form of more or less severe beatings. In other
-words, the same old formula was at work—persuasion and then force.
-
-The Chinese Communists, after the fall of the entire country,
-copied from their Soviet comrades the trick of inviting all the
-industrialists, financiers and scientists who had fled to Canton,
-Hong Kong and elsewhere to return to their Northern homes, where
-they could continue to operate their businesses as before. So in
-1946 Stalin invited all the White Russians living in China to return
-to the USSR. The old birdie in the cage trick! Persuaded that they
-were going to receive fair treatment, many of the expatriate Russians
-gladly gave up their jobs and homes in Shanghai and Tientsin and
-spent their last dollars on passage to Siberia. No word was ever
-heard from many of them, but gradually a few letters appeared,
-smuggled in through Chinese friends, which told of great suffering.
-A few of the hardiest escaped and returned, all with the same
-story—Siberia, the salt mines, death. What happened to their Chinese
-counterparts who heeded the siren song of the victors of Peking we do
-not know, but we can guess.
-
-Communist propaganda is apparent in practically every aspect of
-Chinese life. Only the Opera and the Russian Ballet appear to have
-remained relatively free from taint. The Reds are tremendously
-proud of both of these world renowned examples of creative art and
-make a great show of claiming that they are always performed in
-the “original.” However, when put on before strictly indoctrinated
-audiences, propaganda appears in the shape of Party line
-interpretations of dances, songs and long curtain speeches. The
-audience is never allowed to forget for a moment that it is there to
-be instructed as well as entertained.
-
-The basic purpose of Communist propaganda, of course, is to make
-conquest as easy as possible. The Party line is fed to the people
-like opium, and it dulls their senses and makes them docile. When
-persuasion proves inadequate, threats and brutality are resorted
-to, for in a Totalitarian State no one can remain on the fence.
-Only through complete unity, voluntary or forced, can such a state
-survive. It is impossible for anyone to remain non-political.
-
-Should both persuasion and force fail, the Communists then resort
-to a method which represents an all time low in evil—the use of
-poisonous drugs to draw out false confessions from their victims.
-This is called the “biodynamic” treatment. The drugs, “actedon”
-and “mescaline” are used to paralyze the brain, then to cause its
-disintegration. The doses are administered in coffee, and the victim,
-with nothing else to eat or drink, consumes large quantities, which
-are generously supplied, unaware of the effect being produced on
-his mind and body. When the personality has been sufficiently
-disintegrated or “split” by these drugs—when the sufferer has been
-driven crazy—a skilled psychiatrist can put the pieces together
-at his will and gradually evolve a completely new personality. In
-other words, when the physical breakdown of the individual has been
-accomplished, his mental collapse is brought about by the use of
-these fiendish drugs.
-
-The Communists say, “The average person can be made to give in
-through brutality and fear, but in complicated cases the combination
-of neurology, or brain study, chemistry and psychiatry must be used.”
-Preparing the victim valuable enough for this process often takes as
-long as three or four months, during which time he is jailed and kept
-in solitary confinement. Frequently dozens of doctors, scientists,
-and assistants are worn out in the process of treatment. It is so
-diabolical that the Communists say they use it only in exceptional
-cases where they feel that the results warrant a demonstration to
-the public at large of their complete mastery over man.
-
-The world now knows that this was the treatment administered in
-1949 to Joseph Cardinal Mindszenty, Primate of the Catholic church,
-Budapest; to Michael Shipkov, Bulgarian Translator for the U. S.
-Legation in Sofia; and again in 1950 to Robert A. Vogeler, American
-business executive in Hungary. This same heinous method has been
-repeated in Rumania, Czechoslovakia, Poland, Eastern Germany and
-undoubtedly elsewhere throughout the world, though actual reports of
-every case have not, as yet, come into print.
-
-The use of hypnotism as a propaganda weapon and as a device for
-manipulating victims also has not been overlooked by the Communists.
-Dr. G. H. Estabrooks, Chairman of the Department of Psychology at
-Colgate University, who has pioneered in developing hypnotism’s
-wartime uses, says:
-
-“With the Twentieth Century’s revived interest in psychology,
-hypnotism has been brought to the status of a full-fledged science.”
-
-“A person,” continues Estabrooks, “can be hypnotized against his will
-or without his knowledge.”
-
-“A foreign agent working in a hospital or a doctor in his own office
-could,” he avers, “over a period of time, place thousands of people
-under his power by means of fake physical examinations.”
-
-For instance, he explains how in wartime this masked manoeuver could
-enable a junior medical officer to take over the reins of the U. S.
-Army and lead it into total defeat.
-
-Hypnotism, we now know, was used in addition to drugs by the Nazis to
-obtain a “confession” from Van der Lubbe at the Reichstag Trial and
-also by the Soviet Union to demoralize Cardinal Mindszenty, Robert
-Vogeler and others.
-
-Mao Tse-tung, like all Moscow-trained speakers and others of their
-ilk, is fully aware of the power of hypnosis over large audiences. In
-the early days of victory, he spellbound his listeners not alone by
-words but also by the strength of his mesmeric will.
-
-“Make up your minds! We abhor fence straddlers. There is no middle of
-the road! Not in all China, not in all the universe,” he continued.
-“One must be either on the side of Imperialism or on the side of
-Communism!”
-
-In a speech commemorating the 28th anniversary of the Chinese
-Communist Party, Mao, addressing a mass meeting early in 1950, said:
-
-“Internationally, China belongs to the anti-imperialist front. To
-Russia we proudly look for genuine, friendly aid, and to no other
-country. The second world war, with the Soviet Union as the principle
-fighting force, defeated the great Imperialist powers, Germany and
-Japan. It weakened England and France, and left only one Imperialist
-country in the world—the United States of America! Even _she_
-suffered great losses. Her economy was smashed and her domestic
-crisis is acute! There is great unrest in the country, and the people
-have no leader. They are fighting among themselves. And yet she
-thinks _she_ can enslave the world! She is nothing but a weakling!
-By aiding Chiang Kai-shek, she is responsible for the slaughter of
-millions of Chinese!”
-
-An outburst of applause and cries of “Ding How!” (Good! Good!)
-greeted his words.
-
-Mao continued, waving his arms: “In China, some Imperialism still
-exists in our ‘New Democracy,’ but we will work steadfastly for
-a complete Communist Society. Our tools are the People’s Army,
-Police and Communist Court. Under the leadership of the working
-class, we will unite to form our own dictatorship over the lackeys
-of foreign Imperialism. We will drive them out like dogs, howling
-through the streets! Let us establish a People’s Dictatorship over
-the reactionaries, to be known throughout the world as the People’s
-Democratic Dictatorship. Let us raise China from an agricultural
-country by eliminating all classes, and realizing the state of
-universal fraternity!”
-
-Another storm of applause from the duped audience followed these
-closing words, along with shrill cries of “Long live our People’s
-Dictatorship! Long live our Chairman Mao! Long live our Comrade
-Stalin!”
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER VI
-
- _Manchuria, the Prize_
-
-
-Manchuria is the home of the Manchus who conquered China and ruled
-it until 1911. It is the Prize, the bone of contention over which
-the bloodiest battles have been fought, and the one area in all Asia
-without which neither the Communists nor the Nationalists could hope
-to become a world power.
-
-Studded with Japanese industrial plants, Manchuria is known as the
-Pittsburgh of China, due to the fact that here both coal and iron
-are mined close together. Here, also, is contained seventy per cent
-of the industrial potential of all China. A rugged, windy land,
-much like our American prairie states, it is one of the few places
-in Asia that has a food surplus and serves as the granary of that
-vast region. Farmers, using shaggy Mongol ponies, till broad fields
-of soybeans, millet, corn, wheat and opium poppies. With the great
-abundance of grain, the people are able to produce beef and mutton
-for export.
-
-Even before the Japanese occupation, Manchuria was a thriving center,
-and the conquerors, with characteristic efficiency, speeded its
-industrial and agricultural development during the fourteen years
-of their occupation. They developed the largest coal, iron and gold
-mines in Eastern Asia. From Manchuria alone they obtained more gold
-than from any other source, in addition to five million tons of iron
-and steel and thirty million tons of coal every year.
-
-The great cities in Manchuria, of which Mukden is the capital,
-were modernized. New railroad lines were built into the outlying
-districts, and thousands of workers, heretofore purely agricultural,
-were taught to work in factories. For the first time, modern hotels
-and apartments covered city blocks, and Mukden undoubtedly boasted
-more bathtubs, per capita, than any other city in Asia, with the
-possible exception of Shanghai.
-
-The Generalissimo had believed that Manchuria, when it was liberated,
-would become a part of the Nationalist Government. He had sent
-occupation troops there, had incorporated it into his rightful
-territory, and at the end of the war had already started repairing
-the damage caused by the final phase of the fighting. He was unaware
-of the fact that Roosevelt had promised Manchuria to Russia as her
-price for entering the war against Japan. He still firmly believed
-in Roosevelt’s friendship, because Roosevelt had promised that _all_
-Chinese territory liberated from the Japanese would be returned to
-China.
-
-Although Russia kept a tight rein on the Prize, she did everything
-she could to help and encourage the Chinese Communists. Immediately
-upon entering the war, she began to supply them with arms and
-ammunition captured from the Japanese. At first this was done
-stealthily by the simple ruse of allowing the Chinese Communists
-to “find” these supplies themselves. After V-J Day Russia made no
-attempt to hide from the world her interest in, and her support of,
-the Chinese Communist regime. Besides supplying arms and propaganda
-material, she assisted her lusty child by hampering, in every way,
-the liberation of the Nationalist troops held by the Japanese. Since
-then she has continued to work closely with the Chinese Reds. Li Li
-San, the Kremlin’s Chinese agent, is in command. Russia, therefore,
-takes everything she desires for herself, first.
-
-Russian Armies in the East are composed of Asiatics, closely related
-geographically, racially and politically to the Chinese Communists.
-In behavior they are as clumsy and vindicative as their forebears
-under Genghis Khan. Many peace-loving Chinese, after experiencing Red
-domination, cried out, “Six months under the Communists are worse
-than fourteen years under the Japs.”
-
-As an example of what happens when these people overrun a country,
-let us examine Manchuria at close range. Russian troops taking over
-the country from the Japanese stripped nearly all the factories of
-machinery, but with characteristic inefficiency. When a machine to
-be sent to Russia was dismantled, no effort was made to keep the
-pieces together in numbered crates so they could be reassembled in
-another location. On the contrary, the machines were broken down in
-mass and the jumbled parts loaded into trucks or freight cars with no
-regard whatever to system. Where a machine could not be brought out
-through doors or windows, the whole side of a wall was pushed out and
-the rubble left where it fell. Completely ignorant of the delicate
-mechanism of precision instruments, they permitted them to be left
-out in the rain and snow to rust into utter uselessness. Somewhere
-east of the Urals, the Russians must have a tremendous pile of scrap,
-if it is not scattered along the line of the Trans-Siberian Railway.
-This inability to appreciate and handle machinery may throw some
-light on Russia’s frantic desire to acquire machine tools, at almost
-any cost. Incidentally, the same wanton disregard of everything
-technical applies to the looting of Eastern Europe.
-
-Not only were Manchuria’s factories moved out bodily, piled onto
-freight cars and, in a desultory manner, slowly moved into Siberia,
-but what the troops were unable to take with them, they maliciously
-destroyed. Aside from the Kremlin-activated seizure of the factories,
-the primitive soldiers of the occupying forces, as well as just
-common bandits, stripped Manchuria’s cities of everything that
-could, by any remote chance, be useful to them. Both Chinese and
-Russians followed the age old Mongolian custom and gleefully stole or
-destroyed all personal property that they could get their hands on.
-Even fixtures fastened to the walls were pulled out, and door knobs,
-pipes and plumbing appliances were removed and turned over to the
-government to be made into ammunition.
-
-The Nationalist troops that the Generalissimo had moved in right
-after V-J Day found it well-nigh impossible to defend Manchurian
-property. The Chinese Communists used guerrilla warfare almost
-exclusively against the villagers, their tactics being to terrorize,
-kill and destroy before help could come from the Nationalist troops.
-“Sack and pillage” kept the people in constant panic. In an endeavor
-to isolate and defeat the Nationalists, the Communists tore up all
-the railroads. Peasants were conscripted to dig up hundreds of miles
-of railway track. They burned the ties, levelled the roadbeds, hid
-or carried away the rails, and demolished the drainage structures.
-Practically all the bridges were destroyed by explosives, all signal
-towers and sidetrack mechanisms were wrecked, and every other
-wanton damage that fiendish ingenuity could conceive or devise was
-inflicted. As a final gesture of brutality, captured locomotive
-engineers who were known to have Nationalist sympathies had their
-hands cut off.
-
-This kind of fighting completely destroyed the economy of Manchuria.
-From being a food and industrial surplus area, she became
-poverty-stricken. The people, living in barren houses without
-furniture or utensils of any kind, were reduced to the level of
-their primitive ancestors. Water became the scarcest of commodities
-and, with the reservoirs destroyed, had to be brought up from the
-dirty rivers in buckets. City transportation was at a premium. It
-ranged from the luxury of a pedicab, to ancient carriage bodies
-or automobile chassis, hauled by men, tiny ponies and dogs. A few
-families found a new use for the bathtub which they had been able
-to salvage. Mounted on rickety wheels, it was used as a public
-conveyance, and men, women and children sat huddled together in it.
-Sometimes a huge umbrella, Chinese or foreign, protected them from a
-scorching sun or a driving rain. It made a grotesque picture indeed!
-
-With the disruption of transportation and the commandeering of
-much of the foodstuffs for the troops, obtaining food became the
-major problem of the people of Manchuria. Starvation stalked the
-cities. Mukden families were reduced to eating dung. So precious
-was this commodity that every horse wore a contraption under his
-tail resembling a large, crude dust pan to preserve even minute
-droppings. The very poor mixed mud with the dung, and after baking
-the concoction in the sun used it as food. Hawkers sold it on the
-streets.
-
-Just as the Mongols under Genghis Khan burned, looted and tortured
-when they invaded Cathay, so the modern Mongols have behaved in
-like manner. Some of the more decent among them were so outraged by
-these tactics that they deserted and joined the Nationalists. One,
-a Colonel, told how he had been ordered to round up bandits and
-drive them at bayonet point into villages. Here they were allowed to
-pillage, burn and rape to their hearts’ content. While this was being
-done, the Communists would remain hidden a short distance away. After
-the terror had subsided somewhat, when the village was reduced to
-a shambles and the inhabitants were all but insane, the Communists
-soldiers would rush in and shoot the bandits, ostensibly to rescue
-the villagers. This technique seldom failed to swell the Communist
-ranks. All who resisted conversion were, of course, subjected to more
-drastic treatment.
-
-Another ex-Communist told of teaching little boys of ten and twelve
-to use knives and pistols to murder members of their own families
-who refused to cooperate with the Reds. The child criminals became
-fugitives and were forced to join the guerrillas in the hills.
-
-Many of the well-to-do managed to get away, where, no one knew, but
-the poor, aged and helpless were not exempt from the senseless fury
-of the Mongol hordes. They were used at times as object lessons to
-demonstrate the pitiless power of the Red Terror. According to an
-eye witness, the hands of women and children were sometimes smashed
-with mallets and left dangling like raw hamburgers. These utterly
-miserable creatures wandered insanely through the streets, moaning
-pitifully and gradually dying from loss of blood, infection and
-unendurable pain.
-
-At other times, the Communists tied bombs around the bodies of men
-and women, carted them to thickly populated areas, lighted the fuses
-and left them to explode. This invariably happened at night, when
-the effect was more terrifying. These human torches were supposed
-to be the unreliable Quislings. The method of their disposal by the
-Reds shows how the latter are running true to form. In the days of
-Genghis Khan a Quisling was despised. When he had served his purpose,
-he was taken out and his throat was slit. As an example, there is
-the story of the Battle of Samarkand, when thirty thousand Kankali
-Turks, seeing that the victory was going against them, and hoping
-to save their lives, deserted to the Mongols. They were received in
-a friendly manner and shown every courtesy. Equipped with Mongol
-military dress and weapons, they felt welcome and honored. But, alas,
-after being royally wined and dined, they were massacred to a man.
-Like Stalin, the Mongols had utter contempt for such people.
-
-Conquering armies, however, sometimes get a dose of their own
-medicine, and, when they do, it is apt to be fatal. At least it
-proved so in the case of the forty Russian soldiers who looted a
-Japanese hospital near Mukden. Finding a large vat of alcohol in the
-basement, they spent a riotous night, drinking and carousing. The
-next morning an officer found all forty of them dead. Evidently they
-had never heard of “rubbing” alcohol.
-
-Today, in Manchuria, the Chinese Communists, aided by Russian
-technicians and advisors, are rebuilding the country for their
-own advantage. It is said that Stalin will use Manchuria as an
-experimental training station for Communism. He now controls the
-reconstructed railways in and out of this highly strategic area and
-requires banks to give them fifty to sixty per cent of their loans
-for industrial developments. Some private businesses were told that
-they would not be molested, provided they would do all they could to
-boost production under Communist supervision. During the last three
-years of civil war in China, the Manchurian farmers turned over
-4,500,000 tons of grain to the Communists. In spite of this, they are
-being urged to PRODUCE FOR THE PEOPLE!—to raise more and more grain
-to be exported to Siberia. In Russia’s grandiose scheme of developing
-Siberia with Chinese slave labor, the wealth of Manchuria is her
-greatest industrial asset.
-
-In contrast to Stalin’s close personal supervision of Manchuria,
-experts seem agreed that he will leave China pretty much alone, for
-the time being, and let Mao and other leaders of the moment believe
-that they are solidifying their positions. Sometime within the next
-one, two or three years, he may “liquidate” or “retire” them all and
-replace them with the out-and-out Russian Commissars. How soon Stalin
-will be able to accomplish this, time alone will tell.
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER VII
-
- _The Tragedy of the Generalissimo_
-
-
-Any account of conditions in China today would be incomplete without
-mentioning the Nationalist Government and what it attempted to
-achieve.
-
-The political and social revolution inside China has been in progress
-many years, and these years have been turbulent ones. The Chinese,
-largely illiterate, were for a long time completely isolated. Many
-believed that China was the entire world and that a “foreigner” was a
-Chinese from another province. Patriotism was felt by them only where
-the home and family were concerned.
-
-In 1911, Dr. Sun Yet-sen led a successful revolution and overthrew
-the Manchu Dynasty. Desiring to make China a modern republic, he
-proclaimed as his aim: “To dedicate the few score perishable years of
-our life to the laying of an imperishable foundation for our Nation.”
-To this end he gave his life.
-
-The educated Chinese then began the creation of a modern, unified and
-democratic country. Generalissimo Chiang Kai-shek, co-founder of the
-revolution of 1911, became its second leader in 1925, on the death of
-Dr. Sun. China knew no other leader until 1949.
-
-In the beginning, the Chinese Communist and Nationalist Parties were
-one and the same. They were _the_ Revolutionary Party. An admirer of
-the United States and Great Britain, Dr. Sun first requested their
-help in reorganizing and revitalizing his country, but they refused.
-With no alternative, he was forced to accept the aid of Russian
-revolutionaries who jumped at the chance to tie China up with their
-own impending revolution. Working with the famous Communist, Adolph
-Joffe, Dr. Sun drew up the policy of the new government. However,
-not all the Chinese revolutionaries were radical. Some were moderate
-liberals, and many were wealthy conservatives who desired only a
-more modern setup than the Manchus had. Among the latter the Soong
-family is certainly the best known. This family cleverly safeguarded
-its future by marrying one of its charming daughters, Chingling, to
-Dr. Sun Yat-sen; another, Meiling, to Chiang Kai-shek; and a third,
-Eiling, to Dr. H. H. Kung, a 75th lineal descendant of Confucius.
-This last was of definite psychological significance, as it united
-the mighty Soong family with that of China’s most revered Saint.
-
-When Chiang Kai-shek inherited the mantle of Sun Yat-sen, he
-determined to carry out the policy of the revolution. His actions
-followed his words. Enormous progress was made during the so-called
-“Golden Decade,” between 1927 and 1937. China made a beginning toward
-industrialization and economic stability and improved her educational
-facilities.
-
-This was the age of enormous industrial expansion. Railroads were
-constructed, telephone lines built, and even radio was introduced.
-Electricity and power plants were created, and merchants did a
-flourishing business. Tourist trade was at its height, and Chinese
-and American importers were cooperating harmoniously. Everyone
-_seemed_ to be better off than before, the poor as well as the rich.
-
-
- Chinese Communist Party Koumintang
-
- 1910 Period of +————————————+ 1910
- 1912 | | Dr. Sun Yat-Sen 1911
- 1914 Socialist | | Republican
- 1916 Activity | | Regime 1912
- 1918 |_Revolution_| Kuomintang
- | _and_ | Government
- 1920 Birth of Chinese |_Warlordism_|
- 1922 Communist Party | | 1921
- | | Period of
- | | Cooperation
- 1924 Period of | | Death of Dr. Sun,
- 1926 | | Advent of
- 1928 Russian | | Chiang Kai-shek
- 1930 +————+ +—————+ 1927
- 1932 Interference |
- 1934 _Single | Party_ Hide and
- 1936 “Long March” | Seek Period
- +————+ +—————+
- |_Revolution_|
- 1938 Marco Polo | _and_ |
- Bridge |_Civil War_ | Reconciliation 1937
- +————+ +—————+ Period of Mixed
- 1940 “Yenan | | Civil War,
- 1942 Interlude” | | Cooperation and
- 1944 | | Anti-Japanese
- | | Activities
- | | 1945
- 1946 Period of | | End of
- American +————+ +—————+ Japanese War
- 1948 Interference | |
- |_Civil War_ | 1949
- 1950 USSR and British | | Retreat to
- Recognition | | Formosa 1950
-
- _Chart showing origins of the Chinese Communist Party and the
- Nationalist Party, or Koumintang (KMT), as the latter frequently was
- called_
-
-Thousands of Chinese enthusiastically took part in helping to build
-this New China, and every effort was made to instill a real spirit of
-Nationalism in the hearts of the people. To quote the Generalissimo,
-“If the National Revolution should fail, China, as a nation, would
-have nothing to rely upon. Should this happen, not only would China
-cease to rank as one of the Four Powers of the world, but she would
-be at the mercy of other countries.”
-
-The period of progress, unhappily, was short lived. It had become
-obvious to the Japanese war lords that a patriotic, united China
-might, on the one hand, prove an insurmountable obstacle to their
-own plan to conquer and control all of Asia. On the other hand, it
-would be too sweet a plum to pass up! Twice during the Thirties they
-shelled Shanghai and in 1939 launched a full scale war of aggression.
-All of the cities along the coast were captured, and the Chinese were
-forced to move far inland.
-
-Led by the Generalissimo, thousands of Chinese moved whole libraries,
-printing presses, government records and valuables laboriously up
-the Yangtse River to the city of Chungking. Every kind of river
-craft was used from a few modern boats to small sampans, junks and
-home-made rafts pushed by hand. All had to be either lifted out of
-the water and carried around the rapids in the river or be abandoned.
-Many families travelled on foot, each member carrying a bundle on
-his back. Even children of four and five had their small belongings
-wrapped in a large scarf and tied to the end of a stick slung over
-their shoulders. The road along the river valley became lined with
-food vendors and shoemakers who did a big business in woven straw
-sandals. Professors, surrounded by their students carrying modern
-books or ancient Chinese written scrolls, conducted classes during
-their periods of rest. United with their leader against a foreign
-enemy, the people of China revered and respected the Generalissimo.
-
-At last the long procession of uprooted patriots reached its
-destination, Chungking, and here Chiang set up his military
-headquarters and conducted his affairs of State. The Japanese, unable
-to reach the city by land, attacked almost nightly by air. Without
-anti-aircraft guns or planes of their own, the Chinese suffered
-terrible civilian casualties. A great part of the city was burned by
-incendiary bombs.
-
-On the ruins of the old city, Madame Chiang Kai-shek proceeded
-to build a model village, with schools, nurseries, libraries and
-churches such as she had known in America. The project proved a
-wonderful morale builder. Everybody for miles around took part in the
-construction of the unique little city, and it became the center of a
-broader undertaking known as “The New Life Movement.”
-
-In this new village, personal habits of cleanliness and sanitation
-were taught and ways of being mutually helpful suggested. Concerts
-and community singing were held almost nightly. The Generalissimo,
-wishing to emphasize unselfish cooperation, expressed the philosophy
-of the movement in four simple words: “Honesty, Industry, Sincerity
-and Justice.” There developed, among these people at least, a feeling
-of pride and unity that was well on the way to becoming national
-patriotism. This new spirit of oneness in the face of common danger
-was greater than at any time since Emperor Chin caused the Great Wall
-to be built in 214 B. C. to keep the Huns from invading his Empire.
-
-The Generalissimo’s gallant stand against the modern war machines
-and trappings of the Japanese added shining pages to the history of
-China. History will record a full realization of the importance of
-his contributions to the United States in World War II. After Pearl
-Harbor, while the Japanese won many military successes against the
-Americans and the British, Chiang’s determination to stay in the
-fight saved countless American lives. The Japanese were forced to
-keep a million and a half of their best troops in China, although
-these were needed desperately in the East Indies and the Islands of
-the Pacific, where they were trying to stop the Allied advance under
-General MacArthur and Admiral Nimitz. We in the United States, for
-the first time, became dimly aware of what a capable and relentless
-foe the Japanese could be and of the tremendous battle the Chinese
-had long been fighting.
-
-The Chinese have never been a warlike nation. Their industrial
-development was comparable to that of Europe in the Middle Ages.
-Therefore, their political and economic structures were totally
-unable to meet the demands of a modern military struggle with
-Japan. Regardless of how little they had, however, they fought
-doggedly against increasing odds. When all surface communication
-with the outside world was cut off, their resistance forces burrowed
-underground.
-
-Several times the Japanese offered the Generalissimo very attractive
-peace terms, but he resolutely declined them. He had promised to
-stick with his Allies to the end, to give them his _full_ assistance
-to achieve a decisive victory. His confidence in Roosevelt was
-complete, and, like a great many Americans, British and others,
-Chiang believed Roosevelt incapable of injustice. He was undoubtedly
-familiar with the discussions at the Cairo Conference when Roosevelt,
-in mock seriousness, said to Churchill:
-
-“I think all of the Chinese territory liberated from the Japanese
-during the war should be returned to China, including Hong Kong.”
-
-Churchill, jumping to his feet, said emphatically, “I will never
-permit the return of Hong Kong to the Chinese!”
-
-“Then I will take the matter up, personally, with your King!” said
-Roosevelt.
-
-“The King of England has no authority to give away Imperial
-Territory,” shouted Churchill. “I alone hold that power!”
-
-Roosevelt laughed heartily. He always enjoyed baiting Churchill,
-because the latter was so hot tempered and quick to jump whenever he
-was goaded.
-
-Chiang took Roosevelt seriously.
-
-During the years of the Japanese war, the Generalissimo also had to
-contend with the Communists. The Chinese Red Armies, while giving lip
-service to anti-Japanese activity, were in fact so placed militarily
-as to be facing the Nationalist troops, rather than the Japanese!
-It is true that the Communists made a number of raids on isolated
-Japanese posts, but this they did with the purpose of capturing
-soldiers whom they could then indoctrinate with Communist propaganda.
-Naturally the Japanese resented these raids and retaliated.
-Consequently, there were skirmishes now and then, but they were of
-little importance. The fact still remains that the Japanese fought
-their major war against the Generalissimo’s Armies. Wherever and
-whenever possible, the Chinese Communist Armies helped the enemy by
-attacking Nationalist-held towns and lines of communication.
-
-The Japanese surrender, when it finally came, was received with great
-jubilation throughout China and the world. It was indeed a triumphant
-hour for the Generalissimo. Now, at long last, he was in a position
-to undertake a peaceful rehabilitation of his country and to pick up
-where he had left off when the Japanese struck. He could go forward
-with his program of political and social reforms and establish, first
-of all, a sound economy. The stage was set for his dreams to become
-a reality—the dream that China would take her rightful place in the
-world of democratic nations.
-
-Although the American Ambassador, General Patrick J. Hurley, had told
-Chiang of the decision at Yalta to give Manchuria to Russia as her
-price for entering the war against Japan, the Generalissimo believed
-so firmly in the good will and friendship of Roosevelt that he was
-sure he would be supported in his effort to regain this important
-Northern province. Therefore, as soon after the Japanese surrender as
-possible, he sent troops to occupy and try to hold Manchuria. There
-his army found itself confronted by the Russian Mongolian Army bent
-on the same mission.
-
-At home, likewise, the Generalissimo was faced with ever-increasing
-problems. The Allied and Japanese bombing had caused great
-destruction, not unlike that in Europe. Villages had to be rebuilt,
-factories and lines of communication restored. Millions of displaced
-Chinese were waiting patiently to be returned to their homes.
-Approximately three and a half million Japanese soldiers and
-civilians were ready for repatriation.
-
-With great courage, inexhaustible patience and amazing wisdom, Chiang
-Kai-shek began his program of reconstruction and rehabilitation. He
-little realized that his three great Allies—Russia, England and the
-United States—had plotted behind his back to snatch from his hands,
-in his moment of victory, the one area that could change China from
-a backward agricultural country into a modern and powerful nation.
-Without Manchuria Chiang was lost. This was the juicy bone that first
-the Japanese, then the Communists or the Generalissimo had to have
-to complete their growth as a modern power. Without it each would be
-rendered impotent.
-
-Chiang Kai-shek had fought for eight years to prevent the spread of
-Japanese totalitarianism in China. Now he was confronted with a much
-more vicious brand, Communist totalitarianism. He commented, “The
-Japanese were a disease of the skin. The Communists are a disease of
-the bone.”
-
-Many people wonder why the Nationalist Armies were so ineffective and
-why so many of them went over to the Communists without even putting
-up a fight. Certainly the bulk of the Chinese are not disposed to
-Communism. They just want an opportunity to feed, clothe and shelter
-their families. Most of them do not understand Communism or any other
-political philosophy. Some accepted the new leadership through sheer
-inertia. Some of them leaned toward it in protest against stupid and
-oppressive government police measures, corrupt practices and bad
-administration. Squeeze, or graft as we call it, was never a crime in
-China. The Chinese people have no sense of political right or wrong,
-no convictions about political truths as the Western world recognizes
-them. As one Chinese General put it, “To take from the government is
-no crime.” Indeed the principal weakness of the Generalissimo was the
-very fact that he surrounded himself with men who did not hesitate to
-take all they could get from the government.
-
-Chiang showed the same loyalty to those who surrounded him and
-supported him, including members of his own and his wife’s families,
-as President Truman, for instance, has demonstrated in his loyalty
-to the Pendergast machine and others who have done his bidding.
-The Generalissimo’s honesty and personal integrity have never been
-questioned by those who know him best, and who were in constant
-association with him during the Japanese war. General Wedemeyer
-has attested to this statement and he was the American Chief of
-Staff to Chiang Kai-shek and knew him intimately. For us to say his
-Nationalist Government was corrupt and deserved to fall, amounts to
-the pot calling the kettle black. Such a situation exists today in
-Washington, D. C.
-
-Feeding the armies was Chiang’s greatest problem. The government at
-first gave a lump sum to the army commanders, but many of these were
-unscrupulous rascals who kept most of it for themselves, allocating
-a small remainder to subordinates, who passed a still smaller
-proportion on down through the lower levels to the unprotected
-soldier. This was a century-old practice in China, and the hungry
-soldier was reduced to stealing or appropriating his food from the
-peasant merchants. Naturally there was always trouble between the
-soldiers and the merchants, with no love lost between the two. The
-latter lost their profits, and the soldiers reasoned that they were
-at least entitled to food from the people they were fighting to
-protect. It became increasingly easy for the Chinese Communists to
-win converts. They went with those who offered them food.
-
-In spite of this tragic situation, the Generalissimo, with the same
-patience and strength that had made his war leadership outstanding,
-continued to hold the loyalty of a great number of his people. Long
-after his flight to Formosa, rich and poor, officer and soldier
-continued to fight for his principles. For example, as the Communists
-entered Peking, there was desperate street fighting. The commander
-of a battalion told his men, “We are greatly outnumbered. I cannot
-keep you from going over to the other side, but I have fought the
-Communists for eight years and I will not give up now!” Inspired
-by his brave stand, most of his men remained with him and formed an
-obstacle to the Communist advance. Finally, after an hour of hopeless
-fighting, and when all his men had been killed, the battalion
-commander manned the last machine gun himself and turned it full
-force on the solid front of Communist troops advancing toward him.
-
-The Generalissimo had many such brave soldiers who fought to the
-death in his armies. Not all those loyal to Chiang were soldiers. In
-Canton, after the Communists took over, they held a great celebration
-featuring a long victory parade. This stopped every few miles and put
-on a little skit which showed the Generalissimo on his knees, with
-his hands tied behind his back, confessing his sins to the Communist
-leaders who laughed uproariously! The actor who impersonated Chiang
-received numerous threatening letters. When he reported this to his
-Soviet boss, he was told to disregard the threats and was ordered to
-continue his role. A few days later the actor was shot. Even behind
-the Red Curtain there are still snipers about. In fact there is every
-reason to believe that active guerrilla bands are on the prowl.
-
-In Kwangsi Province, the Southern Province of General Li Tsun-jen,
-pronounced “Lee Tzun-ren,” the villagers found that if they did not
-cooperate with the Communists, they would be shot. On the other hand,
-if they did, they took the chance of meeting a similar fate at the
-hands of Nationalist guerrillas for collaborating with the enemy.
-Undoubtedly this situation existed in many other places.
-
-Many of those who knew the Generalissimo best believed that despite
-the corruption that surrounded him he would go down in history as a
-man of integrity and high purpose. Tribute is paid him by General
-Wedemeyer when he says, “There are few people who can speak more
-authoritatively than I can concerning the sincerity and Christian
-humility of the Generalissimo. I had frequent, almost daily, contacts
-with him for nearly a year. I can vouch for his unselfish devotion to
-the Chinese people and for his earnest desire to provide a democratic
-way of life within China. Surely his loyalty and his faithful
-cooperation during the war fully merit our lasting friendship.”
-
-Our assistance was denied to Chiang, and the outcome of our most
-grievous mistakes will be judged by future historians. Not only the
-United States, but some of the Chinese themselves, selfishly withheld
-the aid they could have given their leader and their country. In
-1946, fifty of the wealthiest Chinese were called in and asked if
-they would each donate a large portion of their enormous fortunes,
-which together ran into the billions, to their government. Bowing and
-nodding their heads, they listened politely, but not one of them was
-willing to sacrifice his future security or even to jeopardize it
-against such stupendous odds.
-
-Support of the State still is a secondary consideration to the
-Chinese. Their principal loyalty—financial, filial, and political—is
-to their own family. As in the ancient days, the poor, the sick and
-the destitute can claim the protection of their nearest relative.
-No matter how distant the relationship, they are given food and
-shelter. Be it said to their credit, there are very few asylums or
-orphanages in China. The family takes care of its own.
-
-Perhaps this idea was in Chiang’s mind when he refused the enticing
-peace terms offered him by the Japanese at Hankow. A devout scholar,
-he quoted Confucius: “The men of old, when they wished their virtues
-to shine throughout the land, first had to govern their states
-well. To govern their states well, they had to establish harmony in
-their families. To establish harmony in their families, they had to
-discipline themselves and set their minds in order. To set their
-minds in order, they had to make their purpose sincere. To make their
-purpose sincere, they had to extend their knowledge to the utmost.
-Such knowledge is acquired through a careful investigation of things.
-For, with things investigated, knowledge becomes complete. With
-knowledge complete, the purpose becomes sincere. With the purpose
-sincere, the mind is set in order, and there is real self-discipline.
-With self-discipline, the family achieves harmony. With harmony in
-the family, the state becomes well governed. With the state well
-governed, there is peace throughout the land.”
-
-With due respect for what the Generalissimo attempted to do in China
-and what he has accomplished on Formosa, I would like to quote one
-paragraph from a scholarly article entitled: “_What Americans Don’t
-Know About Asia_,” appearing in the June 4, 1951, issue of _Life
-Magazine_, written by James Michener, Pulitzer Prize author of
-“_Tales of the South Pacific_”:
-
- “To appreciate the greatness of our loss (of China) one must
- visit Formosa. This island today is the bright spot of Asia. The
- Nationalist government, shaken to its withers by the debacle on the
- mainland, has matured astonishingly in the chastisement of defeat.
- It has established an enlightened commonwealth. Nowhere in Asia is
- the food problem more fairly handled. Nowhere are justice, human
- safety and property—those universal measures of good government—so
- respected and secured. The American cannot visit this island without
- one lament filling his mind: _this_ might have been China today.”
-
-Let us, in the United States, so _act_ in the moments left of the
-immediate and perilous hours of this half-way-mark of the Twentieth
-Century to preclude a similar “chastisement of defeat.” May it never
-be said, by some lone survivor of an atomic attack, tossed upon a
-distant isle, the beauty, dignity and grandeur of which is strangely
-familiar, yet defies Paradise itself: “_This_ might have been
-America.”
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER VIII
-
- _Behind the Red Curtain_
-
-
-Immediately after the Communists gained control of China and occupied
-it from North to South, Russian technicians and advisors poured into
-the country. Everyone was asking: “What are the Russians doing in
-China?”
-
-From a few foreigners and Chinese, who had made an early escape from
-behind the Red Curtain, and from letters later smuggled out of the
-country, came the revealing truth. Some of the informants had lived
-under the Communist yoke for as long as eight and nine months, and
-among these was a United Press correspondent, Chang Kuo Sin.
-
-“The Russians,” he said “began at once to fit China into the
-political-military bloc of Soviet dominated States which, by the
-end of 1949, extended from the Danube River to the Pacific Ocean.
-Their organization was beyond anything China had ever seen, and it
-certainly proved that they had been planning it for a long time.
-I was frankly shocked by the influence they seemed to have on the
-Chinese, from the very beginning.
-
-“The ‘Big Noses,’ as the Chinese called the Russians,” he continued,
-“took over as fast as they could. They tried to make a good
-impression on the Chinese by moving right in with them. They ate
-Chinese food and fumbled with chopsticks, and even wore Chinese
-Communist uniforms made for them in Russia. They had already learned
-to speak Chinese and to write a certain number of characters before
-they arrived. Also, they had been taught some of the old Chinese
-customs, such as raising the rice bowl as a gesture of friendly
-greeting.
-
-“The Russians brought in about seventy railroad engineers to
-supervise the rebuilding of the railroads and bridges damaged by the
-war. They were especially interested in everything military and sent
-movie units around to make films of Chinese strategic areas. A friend
-of mine, who saw them taking pictures, told me that Chinese officers,
-who had been trained in Russia, were showing them all of the defenses
-of the country.”
-
-The original plan, in 1950, was to attack Formosa before the typhoon
-season began in June. The Russians knew then what the world knows now
-from the 1951 release of Dean Acheson’s diplomatic report of December
-23, 1949, that we had written off Formosa as of no importance to
-our Pacific defenses. Acheson tried, in vain, to involve Lieutenant
-General Wedemeyer in this act of treachery. Acheson testified,
-June 1, 1951, that the State Department prepared the report after
-Wedemeyer, then Assistant Chief of Staff, suggested to the State
-Department that it use the _Voice of America_ to “minimize” any
-damage that might result from the fall of Formosa. But we know
-from the complete _Wedemeyer Report_ that the General advocated
-unequivocal defense of Formosa as being of definite strategic
-importance in our chain of defenses in the Pacific. MacArthur and
-Wedemeyer both had warned that the fall of Formosa would leave Japan,
-Okinawa and the Philippines outflanked. The following is an account
-of how the enemy planned to take Formosa with an offensive beginning
-June, 1950.
-
-Chang Kuo Sin reported: “We are given to understand that the island
-will be taken by the biggest land, sea and air force that has yet
-been launched against any place within the Russian orbit. They
-will muster hundreds of fighting planes and thirty warships, plus
-thousands of troops for this invasion. The warships, of course,
-include many that went over to the Communists from the Nationalist
-forces.”
-
-The Chinese correspondent was not the only one who watched with
-alarm the preparations for the invasion of Formosa. From every side
-came evidence of the size and strength of the forces assembling
-for the attack. The British, after recognition of the Communist
-Government, and in order to protect their investments, were forced
-into the distasteful position of giving them, by court order, ninety
-airplanes. Worth twenty million dollars, these planes belonged to
-the airline companies owned by the picturesque American flyer Claire
-L. Chennault, whose famous “Flying Tiger” raids on the Japanese
-added brilliant pages to American military history. This high-handed
-transfer of American-made planes, probably the best in the world
-outside those in use by the U. S. Air Force, to the Communists by
-the British was cause for alarm in official circles. The planes will
-undoubtedly wind up under the direct control of the Kremlin, whether
-or not they are used for the initial air assault on Formosa.
-
-The ground forces were nominally to be under the command of the Mayor
-of Shanghai, who was said to have marshalled a picked force of one
-hundred and eighty thousand troops for the invasion. Their training
-in beach landings and personal combat was supervised by the Russians,
-and many of their special weapons are said to have been of Soviet
-make. The Mayor, a pawn of the Russians, was content to leave the
-military strategy entirely in the hands of his more than helpful
-allies.
-
-Russian engineers were busy at every port from which the invasion
-might be launched. After forcing those already on the job to resign,
-they hired shipbuilders and began work on the dockyards, repairing
-the damage caused by Nationalist bombings. They assembled ships of
-different sizes and made them ready for invasion day. So we see that
-the Russians were well occupied in Shanghai.
-
-The fact that American troops were withdrawn by the State Department
-from occupation in South Korea a few months earlier, left that
-country a more logical target of opportunity to begin their
-aggressive action. This explains why the Formosa attack was not made
-as originally scheduled in 1950.
-
-In Canton the Russians were busy moving complete factories to
-Siberia, just as they had done earlier in Manchuria. This, they
-said, was to save them from Nationalist bombs. The real reason was
-that they needed them to build up Siberia industrially. Most of
-the Southern factories produced cement, cotton cloth or chemicals,
-vitally needed to support the large Siberian populace. It mattered
-little to the Russians that China needed these same commodities
-for herself. When workers complained that they could not live
-without their jobs, the Communist bosses said: “Well, then, come
-along with your plant and bring your family.” When the workers,
-usually encumbered with large families, would ask hopefully about
-transportation, they would always receive the same reply: “Can’t you
-walk? We did on the ‘Long March.’ You can, too.”
-
-The Chinese are always desperately in need of doctors, and the
-Communists, right after taking over the country, allowed the
-physicians to go about their business unmolested, provided they did
-not discuss politics. So great was the demand for medical services
-that outrageous fees were charged. The Communists permitted this
-situation to continue, as it kept the doctors happy. With a flood
-raging in China and plague beginning to show itself, doctors were a
-priceless commodity. Even Russian doctors and scientists were brought
-in and added to the Ministry of Health in China.
-
-Although the flood of 1950 was the worst one in years, it did not
-stop the Russians from sending food out of the country and into
-Siberia. The Chinese granaries were empty, and everyone was hungry.
-In Shanghai alone there were reported at least a hundred and twenty
-thousand foodless and homeless refugees, and no agency was able to do
-anything for them. It became dangerous for the average citizen, poor
-though he might be, to go out in the streets at night. Every morning
-a number of dead bodies were found piled up against the walls of
-buildings.
-
-Mao Tse-tung, his slogans still promising “Abundance for All,”
-ordered a part of the army to work on the cooperative farms and
-offered handsome rewards for boosting food production. In Peking
-the worried Chinese Communists admitted that there were some nine
-million people dead or dying in those areas, but that they were
-unable to halt the shipments out of the country. Starving beggars in
-filthy rags, a not unusual sight in China during the famine and flood
-seasons, died by the score on the streets of Nanking and Shanghai,
-where they had come with the faint hope of finding work. These
-were the stronger ones; the weaker were never able to leave their
-villages, or else they fell along the way.
-
-“Food is the one vital concern here,” said a letter from Peking. “Any
-kind of food. Even if you have money there is very little to buy, and
-everybody is poor down to the bone. We are thoroughly sick of the
-whole situation, but what can we do? Our friends are sent to jail if
-they complain about anything, sometimes even if they voice an opinion
-about the Communists that is not flattering.
-
-“The beautiful lawns and gardens in the public parks and surrounding
-the homes of wealthy families have been plowed up and planted with
-vegetables. When this is not done within a reasonable length of time,
-soldiers enter, armed with guns, and ask politely: ‘You would like
-to have your gardens Produce for the People, would you not?’ In any
-case, the owner is lucky if he is permitted to keep a small share
-of what he is able to raise. After the gardens are taken over, it
-is a matter of the Camel in the Arab’s tent. Next, the valuables
-in the house are removed, to be sent out of the country in return
-for dollars and pounds. Then the troops or Party officers quarter
-themselves comfortably in the house, and if there is the slightest
-difficulty, the owners are forced out.”
-
-Another letter said, “It is considered very bad taste, if not
-dangerous, to appear well off, and when I go to market I wear my
-oldest clothes to avoid being conspicuous. Only the Communist
-Hierarchy go about dressed in furs and finery, and they never go out
-except in shiny limousines.”
-
-Adding to the difficulty of obtaining food and other necessities,
-Communists, for propaganda reasons, had put the pedicabs and
-rickshaws off some of the streets in the larger cities. The price of
-gasoline went up so high that no one could use his car, even if he
-still had one. Thus transportation became another severe problem.
-Only a few crowded, rickety busses still operated, and these were
-almost impossible to board. They were so packed that people clung
-tightly to each other at the doors, somewhat reminiscent of rush-hour
-in the New York subway. Those not able to get on the vehicles
-dog-trotted along behind. The busses never ran on any schedule, and
-the driver, if given a large enough bribe, would even change the
-route at a moment’s notice.
-
-From a Chinese refugee now living in San Francisco, I learned that
-Peking families, as well as others in the Northern area, were sending
-their children out of the country on the pretext of aiding their
-fathers in business. “We try to make the Communists feel that we are
-cooperating with them wholeheartedly. Then, when we are sure that we
-have their confidence and that it is safe, we ask them if we may
-send our son or daughter to Hong Kong for business reasons or, better
-still, on work for the Party. If they are lucky enough to get away,
-they may have to stay in Hong Kong three or four months before they
-can book passage on a ship. When we hear, via the grapevine, that
-they are safe on board, we do not care what becomes of us.”
-
-A tragic letter from a former military attaché in Washington during
-the war told of the fall of Shanghai and the stampede of hundreds of
-people trying to get away from the Communists. “The conquerors closed
-the gates of the city during most of the day and night to prevent
-crowds from trying to reach the railway stations or river banks and
-wharves. Steamships anchored in mid-stream to protect themselves from
-the mobs that tried to board them. Had everyone been successful in
-the attempt, the ships would have capsized. It was necessary to go
-out in small sampans and junks. Ropes with knots tied at intervals,
-to which people could cling, were thrown over the sides of the ships.
-I saw one father fasten a rope to his three children, and then the
-family tried to scale the ship’s side. Suddenly, when they were all
-about half-way up, the child at the top slipped or let go, pushing
-the other children with him as he fell. The parents screamed wildly
-and jumped into the churning, muddy water after them. Their cries
-were heart rending.”
-
-In talking to Americans and Chinese who have returned to the United
-States, I caught many interesting and authoritative glimpses of life
-behind the Red Curtain. For instance, as with Stalin in Moscow, no
-one in China seemed to know where in Peking Chairman Mao lived. Some
-said he had taken over the Wagon Lits Hotel, others that he had a
-place in the country. Some said he appeared on the streets rarely,
-although he was seen at official gatherings now and then. At one
-such affair, Mao displayed a batch of letters, supposed to have been
-received from non-Communists, telling how pleased they were at the
-way the Communists had taken over and how courteous they had been.
-The tone of all these letters was flattering and to the effect that
-the non-Communists were impressed with their new masters. What Mao
-did not know, or did not mention, of course, was that the letters had
-been written and signed under duress and that, later, the writers had
-pleaded with friends going out of the country to tell those to whom
-the letters were addressed that nothing could be further from the
-truth.
-
-The Communists strictly censored all mail coming into China,
-especially from the United States. Many letters were confiscated when
-they contained names and information about people the Reds wished to
-add to their files, and almost always when there was money in them.
-
-Mao and Chou En-lai were said to be on very good terms with a number
-of Russian advisors. All called each other by their first names. The
-Chinese also were copying Russian ways with surprising alacrity. I
-learned that one of the most popular of the adopted Moscow customs
-was wife-swapping, or free love. In the New Democracy marriage was
-performed and terminated merely by mutual consent, Russian style.
-There was no exchange of vows when mating was done for the Cause,
-no priest or magistrate to pronounce the pair man and wife or to
-separate them later. Mrs. Chou En-lai told me very frankly in 1946
-that she had never been legally married to her well-known husband.
-“The New Democracy did away with all that,” she said. “We did away
-with ceremonies. They are foolish and we don’t need them. Such things
-are for you Imperialists!”
-
-Such laxity in marital affairs has long been the accepted custom in
-Russia, and indeed the Russian official often finds himself going
-even further, sometimes involuntarily. A Soviet army officer arriving
-at the Shanghai Airport not long ago looked around for his wife. She
-was nowhere in sight. A good looking blonde walked up to him and
-asked, “Are you Colonel Kovicov?” “I am,” he replied, a little taken
-aback. He had never seen her before and felt a faint chill when she
-said, “I am your wife now, on Party orders.” He knew then that he was
-under suspicion.
-
-Another high official in Russia returned home from an arduous day in
-the Politburo and found that his “wife” had been replaced by a new
-and not so pretty one. “Who are you?” he asked rather sadly, and she
-replied, “You know who I am. I am the wife assigned to go with you to
-China.” It developed that this woman spoke Chinese fluently, a talent
-not possessed by the deposed mate. One may also infer that she was
-more adept at spying.
-
-Furs, silks, cosmetics and some jewelry were said to have been
-brought into China at times by the Russians as rewards for faithful
-service, and many a smart Party woman already had a neat nest egg
-laid away in clothes and other commodities, such as the Communist
-“unmentionable” one, money.
-
-Americans who admire China and the Chinese will be disheartened by
-a letter written by a retired colonel in the United States Army and
-an old China hand. “The campaign of hatred stirred up against the
-United States is impossible to realize unless you are right here on
-the spot,” he wrote. “We are constantly branded as the worst enemies
-China ever had. All the people who spent their lives here working
-for China and the Chinese are called spies or tools of Imperialism.
-At first they were polite and assured us that we could do business
-as usual. Later we felt that we were being eased out, and finally we
-were kicked out. We are all suspected of being agents of the American
-Government and can never go out on the street without being jostled,
-jeered at and spat upon. Many of us in Shanghai have been beaten,
-jailed and fined huge sums before being released. Two men I know have
-been taken out of their houses at night and beaten up. I don’t know
-how much longer we will be able to stay here, but you can expect us
-as soon as we can get away. I have plenty to tell when I do get home!
-It is difficult to leave, as everyone has to have a Chinese vouch
-for his good behavior before he can go. This Chinese friend actually
-becomes a hostage, and any criticism of the Communist Government on
-the part of the American may endanger his life.”
-
-A correspondent in Shanghai was one of the Americans who was sure
-that it would be possible to “do business” with the Communists. He
-wrote a letter to the effect that “things really are not going to
-be as bad as people are inclined to believe. They have assured me
-that my office will not be molested and that they are very anxious
-to do business with the foreigners.” A few days after the Reds took
-Shanghai, they locked him up in that same office and confiscated his
-business. He was allowed to return to the States, but, like everyone
-else, had to leave his Chinese hostage behind him. When his American
-ship stopped at Hong Kong, he talked to the press. A few days later,
-when his ship was in mid-ocean, he received a radio message saying
-in effect: “Make no statements about China. Authorities holding me
-responsible.”
-
-American missionaries fared no better than the businessmen. Many
-churches were sealed officially as they were considered “private
-organizations” which, under Communism, cannot exist. Christian
-pastors of all faiths were made to register with the police and were
-questioned for hours as to their attitudes toward the Russians and
-the Chinese Communists. They were told plainly that although the
-Communists “guaranteed” them freedom of religious _belief_—that is, a
-man could believe anything he wished if he did not talk about it—they
-intended to eliminate all freedom of religious _action_—that is, no
-gathering together for the purpose of worship would be tolerated. And
-this was in late 1948 and early 1949!
-
-So much for the Americans. How did the British fare after recognizing
-the Communist Government? Once feared and respected throughout the
-Orient and now huddled together on their little island of Hong Kong,
-they were forced to eat humble pie from the hands of the Communists
-sitting on the front steps of their one-time imperial domain. At
-stake was their one billion, two hundred million dollar investment,
-the key to what was left of their Empire in the Far East.
-
-A correspondent from Hong Kong wrote, “The city is packed with
-refugees, Chinese, British and Americans. It is terribly expensive.
-As much as three thousand Hong Kong dollars down payment is required
-before you can rent a room, and everything else is sky high. It is
-dreadfully hot, there are few parks or out-of-door places to sit,
-and almost nowhere to eat. The Communists are everywhere. They have
-closed most of the bookstores except those run by the Communists,
-and these carry nothing, of course, except books and magazines about
-Communism. Even the British bookstores are forced to carry Party
-literature. It was impossible to get a doctor when my wife was sick,
-as the Communists will not issue licenses to practice to any but
-British doctors, and they are so busy with the care of both Chinese
-and foreigners that they are worn out. With such overcrowding, many
-are sick, as you can imagine. I wish I could send my family home, but
-it is impossible. It takes many weeks or months to get reservations.
-We are just trapped!”
-
-Thus the Lion’s mighty roar, that once thundered throughout the
-world, was reduced to a whimpering sniffle. Everywhere the British,
-especially in the foreign office in London, were embarrassed at
-the turn of events. Dr. Cheng Tien-shi, the Chinese Nationalist
-Government’s ambassador to Great Britain, was called in and told
-that England had recognized the Chinese Communist Government and that
-his office must be vacated. With Confucian calm the elderly Chinese
-gentleman faced the youthful Minister of State, Hector McNeil.
-The latter fingered his tie, cleared his throat and, shifting his
-feet uneasily, read the announcement in a strained voice. Sitting
-down with McNeil, Cheng recalled the days when it was fashionable
-to praise Chiang Kai-shek for his magnificent stand against the
-Japanese. He quoted Mark Anthony’s speech over the dead body of
-Caesar:
-
- “_But yesterday the word of Caesar might
- Have stood against the world. Now lies he there,
- And none so poor to do him reverence._”
-
-Several times McNeil referred deferentially to Cheng, who is one of
-the greatest living Chinese philosophers, as “Mr. Ambassador.” At
-length, the gentle old man asked politely, “How can you still call
-me ‘Mr. Ambassador?’” McNeil replied, “Once an Ambassador, always an
-Ambassador.” The Chinese scholar hesitated a moment and then said,
-“In my country, we have a similar saying, ‘Once a friend, always a
-friend.’ Homage to force and violence is a dangerous thing. If you
-worship Caesar, you will die by Caesar. Why must you bury us while we
-are still very much alive? One day you will need us again.”
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER IX
-
- _Quo Vadis?_
-
-
-The dangers facing the United States and the countries friendly to
-us are becoming increasingly serious. We must recognize the fact
-that, as individuals, we are as responsible for what is happening
-today as were the people living peacefully at one time under Hitler,
-Hirohito and Stalin, and whom we heartily condemn for having allowed
-disastrous conditions to develop and get beyond their control.
-
-Concerning the forces building up around us and the world today,
-we are still far too apathetic and complacent. Much of the
-responsibility for this must, of necessity, be placed upon our
-leadership. We know that America is the one bastion of freedom left
-in the world today, and that continued strength in it reflects the
-hope of the world—that is, of the free peoples of the world as well
-as those behind iron curtains everywhere who now know the true
-meaning of slavery which was sold to them in the guise of “security.”
-
-Remaining strong entails a price. What is it? To me, above all, it
-requires faith in God, faith in our fellow man and faith in ourselves
-and other individuals of personal integrity. Meanwhile, we must
-first keep strong our foundations of initiative, self-reliance and
-individual responsibility for our actions with respect to our duties
-to our own country.
-
-Unfortunately many people in America have believed the Henry Wallace
-theory that it was an “over-abundance” or “excessive production”
-which brought on the depression of the Thirties, or that has or
-ever could, cause any depression. But this is not true. Economists
-tell us today that “misdirected production, plus misdirected and
-over-stimulated consumption” aided our previous downfall, and that
-it was an abuse of our credit, both at home and abroad. But what
-does this mean? Was part of our trouble then, as now, caused by too
-many loans to foreign countries for goods bought here, and an abuse
-of credit to consumers (you and me) here at home? This did bring on
-the boom of the late Twenties and also the terrific maladjustment
-which the depression of the Thirties should have corrected, but
-which it could not, under the circumstances existing then. The
-“over-abundance” or “excess savings” theory—that we had so much that
-we could well afford to give it away—is dangerously misleading. It
-was invented to justify unwise, if not calculated, giving to foreign
-countries with the resultant weakening of our own country to a point
-where Social Security and many other “social laws,” including the
-limitation of productive effort were adopted as expediencies here at
-home. Outright charity to people has, throughout history, tended to
-destroy their moral fiber. Proud people will not, moreover, accept
-charity and will be determined to work out their own salvation.
-Finland is just such an example. Contrast that country’s attitude
-with France today, and even with England.
-
-Our country, America, has always been a philanthropic one. No one,
-in his right mind, could or ever has, questioned the humanitarian
-feelings of the American body politic, but unless our assistance is
-selective and well timed, it cannot bring permanent relief, nor can
-it accomplish worthwhile objectives.
-
-There are some who say that America has always had a hit-or-miss
-approach to most of her problems, and that Lady Luck has been on
-our side. This also is not quite so. In the 19th Century, we had
-a relatively free competitive society—not perfect, of course, but
-the best we’d ever had. The laws which govern human nature under a
-government of limited powers, such as we had under the Constitution
-before we began changing it, operated then. During that period these
-laws governing human nature were patterned on a system of checks and
-balances, remarkably similar to those dictated by God to Moses at
-Mount Sinai. The hit-or-miss approach became apparent only when we
-began to turn to government “to relieve us from our mistakes under
-freedom.”
-
-We know that this nation came into being after the victory of
-the War of Independence. At this time, a Constitution was drawn
-up and ratified by the states. But there is more to it than
-that. A confusion in terms always has led to a misunderstanding
-in definition. There are some who feel quite strongly that
-“democracy” is a principle, and was never intended to become a
-form of government. The word “democracy” does not appear once
-in our Constitution, the Bill of Rights, or the Declaration of
-Independence. In our Salute to the Flag, known by every school boy
-and girl in America, it is the “Republic” for which we stand—not a
-“Democracy.” Of course the words are used almost interchangeably in
-the encyclopedia, and we know that the purest form of democracy
-envisions the realistic participation in the government on the part
-of all the governed. Town meetings were typical of this in the past,
-but as our society became more complex, it was found impractical
-to hold these, and as a result, representatives were selected, and
-a Republic evolved. It all boiled down to what might be called a
-practicing democracy, because people do have the opportunity today
-to make their desires known as to how and by whom they will be
-governed—that is, however, on condition that they express themselves
-at the voting polls.
-
-The framers of our Constitution sought to give each department of
-government its due share of power, and to prevent any one of them
-from making itself supreme. In his “_Back to the Republic_,” Harry
-E. Atwood comments: “Almost daily Russia is spoken of as ‘the new
-republic.’ That phrase is as inaccurate as it would be to speak of a
-drunken man as a new example of temperance. To speak of Mexico as a
-‘republic’ is as inaccurate as it would be to speak of fanaticism as
-a new form of reverence. To call Communist China a ‘republic’ is as
-far-fetched as it would be to speak of insomnia as a new form of rest
-... for at the present time, these are all types of democracy, they
-are not republics....”
-
-In the “_Federalist_,” James Madison said of our government: “The
-true distinction between these forms (democracy and republic) is that
-in a democracy the people meet and exercise the government in person.
-In a republic they assemble and administer it by their representative
-agents.... The first question that offers itself is whether the
-general form and aspect of the government be strictly republican? It
-is evident that no other form would be reconcilable with the genius
-of the American people.”
-
-We know from the experiences of other nations that perfection in
-government never has been found _via_ the route of mob rule. If
-we think otherwise we play right into the hands of the Communists
-and all others who oppose our government. Unethical procedure
-in any established order is brought about little by little. The
-theory of lesser concessions is always active. In our trend toward
-paternalism in government we must constantly guard against the ogre
-of an established bureaucracy, a denying to the individual those
-“inalienable rights” of “life, liberty and the pursuit of happiness,”
-so definitely vouchsafed to him in the Republican form of government
-which was established in this country “under God.” With any
-impairment of our system of checks and balances, all power to protect
-every man’s God-given rights is rendered impotent.
-
-Everywhere people are expressing the thought that, “Things just
-can’t go on like this,” and “What is going to happen?” Is there
-then, a sense of impending judgment in the very atmosphere itself?
-Let me illustrate the theory of lesser concessions mentioned above.
-Back in September, 1932, during a campaign speech at Sioux City,
-President Roosevelt accused the Hoover administration of being the
-greatest spendthrift in U. S. history; that bureaus and bureaucrats
-had been retained at the taxpayers’ expense, and then he proceeded
-to out-Hoover Hoover with alphabetical agencies to the point where
-cartoonists branded us “alphabetical goofs.”
-
-The Foundation for Economic Education at Irvington-on-Hudson, has
-compiled some interesting statistics:
-
- “Expended by all Presidents up to Lincoln $ 1,795,319,694
- “Expended by Lincoln (including the
- Civil War) 3,252,380,410
- “Spent by Johnson thru Taft 19,373,146,217
- “Wilson (including World War I) 47,938,260,143
- “Warren G. Harding 6,667,235,429
- “Calvin Coolidge 18,585,549,115
- “Herbert Hoover 15,490,476,636
- “Franklin D. Roosevelt (including eight
- years of peace) 67,518,746,001
- “Total expended by all Presidents from
- the beginning to July 1, 1945 $179,630,113,645
- “Total spent by Harry S. Truman from
- July 1, 1945, to September 1, 1949 $191,081,394,191”
-
-With constantly rising taxes and increased government spending, the
-dollar bill soon will be worthless, as will be the paper on which it
-is printed. A mathematician figuring hurriedly on his cuff, comments:
-“We’ll be back to where the South was in 1865, with its worthless
-Confederate money.” Why? Little by little our executive branch has
-usurped the functions of Congress, under the flimsy guise of a
-so-called “mandate” from us, the people. Unless we become _aware_ of
-what we have permitted to happen in our midst, and elect people to
-Congress who will make the government their servant and not their
-master, we will soon be where the Germans were under Hitler, the
-Italians under Mussolini, and where the Russians are today, under
-Stalin—and the British to a lesser degree, under their socialist
-regime.
-
-For the first time in global history, the forces are drawn between
-two distinct ways of life—Christianity and Barbarism. Through the
-cobwebs of confusion and the roadblocks of distortion we now know
-that our one enemy is Stalin and his particular brand of thuggery.
-Modern, civilized peoples throughout the universe, including those
-behind the iron curtain, have but one common enemy—Communism. If we
-do indeed believe what we profess, as Christians, to believe, “Man
-cannot serve God and Mammon,” how can we expect a United Nations to
-succeed in anything so long as the head of the Communist Governments,
-the world over, is represented in its midst?
-
-All doubt and uncertainty has been dispelled as to who, where and
-how our enemy operates. In China we have seen the Communist system
-operate to the complete disintegration of human rights. Here in
-the United States we do not know precisely how many Communists are
-among us, or exactly where and how they connive. We are told on
-good authority (J. Edgar Hoover) that they are growing in strength
-and numbers as well as going underground, but we are unable to put
-our fingers on enough of them. Communism operates and succeeds by
-deception here as in the early phases of China’s recent history.
-It bores from within. Frequently its voice is soft and seductive,
-like the voice of Delilah, and equally treacherous. As we have seen
-though, once it has the situation in hand, it does not hesitate to
-use brute force.
-
-In contrast, what we call Democracy makes its mistakes openly for
-all to see and endeavor to correct. Democracy, to us, means complete
-personal liberty, the right to live, work and play how, when and
-where one chooses, in open competition, and is maintained by a
-process of checks and balances or trial and error. We who live in
-this atmosphere of free enterprise, take these things for granted,
-while treason catches us off guard. Until we recognize this, we will
-continue to be at the mercy of organized political traitors both
-foreign and domestic. We can no longer afford to assume a casual
-attitude, even though history reveals that the Communism of Stalin,
-like other world shaking movements in the past, if given sufficient
-time, will fall of its own weight.
-
-“Well,” you may ask: “If Communism is going to fall anyway, (or be
-pushed), why bother to do anything about it now?” The answer is
-simple. We must do something about it now because generations, even
-centuries, may elapse before it collapses without help other than
-human intervention. In the meantime, what will happen to us and
-to our children? Do we realize the long period of humiliation and
-degradation, with increasing controls by the Communists, that this
-means?
-
-War, a global holocaust, in the not too distant future seems a much
-more likely turn of events. We know that Russia is expanding and
-improving her military force, including long range submarines and
-airplanes as well as ultra-destructive weapons. She has more planes
-than the United States and other democracies put together. We are
-told that Russia is making A bombs and has already had at least one
-atomic explosion behind the Iron Curtain. The H bomb is a logical
-sequel. She is capable, we understand, of delivering a surprise
-atomic attack against any part of the United States, while we have no
-sure defense against such an attack. Her submarine fleet rapidly is
-being patterned after Germany’s and this, with her other combat ships
-will make her the third greatest Naval Power. She has an army of two
-and one-half million uniformed troops and thousands of undercover
-agents to act as spies or scouts. We know that she is on a complete
-war footing, just as England was during the latter days of World War
-II and as we made an attempt to be.
-
-This is grave food for thought. If our most responsible leaders are
-assured that Russia is intending to attack us within a short time,
-then should we not prepare and attack first, trying with the initial
-blow, so to paralyze the enemy that she will be unable to retaliate.
-This would be a terrible decision to have to make, and we may not
-have the chance, but we must give it serious thought.
-
-As long as Russia feels that she is winning the cold war, however,
-she would be a fool to start a hot one she might lose. I do not
-believe that she would even let herself be goaded into it. When
-she is ready to strike, she will strike, of that we may be sure.
-It may be possible that the men in the Kremlin are hesitant about
-upsetting their present position, fearing counter-revolution at home
-and abroad. Perhaps the mighty armada is for propaganda purposes
-and to hold the Red Empire together. If this is so, we must never
-relax our own efforts behind the Iron Curtains everywhere in order to
-enlist the support of the unhappy 90 per cent of the enslaved people,
-without whose help we cannot hope to defeat the Soviet Union. Our
-most powerful secret weapon is not the A or the H bomb, but this same
-overwhelming majority of victims who fought and won a revolution only
-to find that they had been sold down the river at the moment of their
-victory.
-
-These terrorized victims in every country are our most powerful
-potential allies, and we must do all in our power to make them
-understand that we are in sympathy with them—with their hopes and
-prayers for liberation—and that the only thing we reject is Communist
-despotism. All peoples who are denied the basic freedoms of speech,
-press, religion, assembly—immediately become enormous whispering
-galleries. There is greater “lure” in suppressed facts and ideas than
-there is in political propaganda. Even the threat of death will not
-keep people from reading forbidden material when they are hungry for
-news from those who may be sympathetic to their plight. But all this
-would take well-trained counter espionage, and it would cost money.
-
-It would make sense to me if, first of all, we saw to it that our
-homeland was protected—but not by an armed camp or maintained by a
-disproportionate amount of military might that would hamstring our
-economy or deprive us of too many of our liberties. Our military
-forces should be trained and equipped to provide a reasonable degree
-of military security for the United States. Then, bring about this
-same type of coordination in Canada and the Latin American countries,
-thereby creating a modicum of safety throughout the Western
-Hemisphere.
-
-In doing the above, we’d be licked before we started unless we
-made assurance doubly sure that we, the people, knew beyond all
-possibility of doubt, what was going on and why. Once we are
-possessed of complete understanding, and support the purpose for
-which we may be called upon to make the greatest sacrifices of our
-lives—even including our lives if need be—our objectives will thus
-be constantly in view. We know this would require a rebirth or a
-resurgence of courageous leadership, honesty and integrity—and an old
-fashioned “patriotism” too long lacking in our leaders. But are not
-these qualities still inherent within us? They were, certainly, until
-clever and sinister propaganda infiltrated our very marrow.
-
-To go a step further. We know that we cannot stop with our own
-Western Hemisphere. Our thinking and our responsibility is now
-global. There’s “no hidin’ place” anywhere. Therefore we must improve
-our position, militarily, economically and psychologically throughout
-Europe and Asia by helping nations and peoples there to help
-themselves to keep their few remaining freedoms. Of course we have to
-protect certain sea and air routes to and from our best sources of
-raw materials.
-
-To me, it is sheer nonsense to give, indiscriminately, whether it
-be money or military aid, without stipulating that we get something
-for it. To do otherwise is contrary to individual human nature, and
-yet as a nation, we have given billions in money and material—not
-to mention thousands of lives in Korea—without demanding anything
-in return. To keep on throwing good money, things and men into the
-hopper will bring no permanent relief, nor will it accomplish any
-outright objective.
-
-We need oil from the Middle East, uranium from the Belgian Congo,
-or anywhere else we can get it, and we need tin and rubber from
-southeast Asia, plus other important things. But if we are cut
-off and cannot get them, then we can use our almost unprecedented
-ingenuity in the department of synthetics. Germany demonstrated what
-can be accomplished with ersatz.
-
-I agree heartily with Generals MacArthur and Wedemeyer, and others,
-who have not expressed their views openly, or who have so indicated
-and been severely reprimanded for it, that we must have areas of
-operation such as the British Isles, Formosa, the African coast,
-Philippines, Japan, the Scandinavian Peninsula, Denmark, Iberian
-Peninsula and Saudi Arabia. These could be held or taken, if need be,
-with a minimum of manpower, for we know our weapons are far superior
-to those of our enemy, both in mechanics and quality, while their
-manpower is far in excess of anything that we can muster. From these
-so-called “islands” it would be possible for the allied forces to
-rain ultimate death and destruction on the enemy, and without them we
-are powerless to strike except from long range.
-
-To those who, like General Marshall, insist that we must have
-an enormous land army, or armies, to go in and occupy conquered
-territory so as to be able to control the people, I give this answer,
-or make this suggestion. Why not establish colonies of people of
-all nationalities, who would be charged with responsibilities of
-teaching people how to produce or earn a living and to study forms
-of government suitable for creating small civil communities that
-could be transplanted into any conquered territory after organized
-resistance had been broken by the military? This would be entirely
-within the realm of possibility, and it would definitely conserve our
-most precious potential—manpower.
-
-It has been said that: “Every despotism has an especially known
-and hostile instinct for whatever keeps up human dignity and
-independence. Materialism is the sister doctrine of every tyranny,
-whether of the one or of the many. To crush what is spiritual, moral,
-human in a man by specializing him; to form more wheels of the great
-social machine, instead of perfecting individuals ... is the dominant
-drift of our epoch.... The test of every religious, political or
-educational system, is what it does to man. If it injures his
-intelligence, it is bad. If it injures his character, it is vicious.
-If it injures his conscience, it is criminal.”
-
-Expediency is the voice of danger. We must do away with the false
-idea that immediate and temporary gain is a substitute for moral
-principle. We can recognize, as did Thomas Jefferson, that:
-“Whenever a man casts a longing eye on office, a rottenness begins
-in his conduct.” We must become aware that slavery develops in
-direct proportion as government control becomes a substitute for
-self-control and responsibility. Search for the solution at the
-spiritual instead of the material level.
-
-Aristotle, the philosopher, has told us: “There are a million ways
-to be wrong, but only one way to be right.” A principle is a very
-tangible “element” that we treasure as an active force of life or
-nature or—God. If we know, in our hearts, that a thing is _right_,
-even though the results of such thought or action may not become
-evident within the span of our own lifetime, and we go ahead and
-sacrifice the principle for expediency, ours is a crime far greater
-than that which was committed by the hand that “all the perfumes of
-Arabia could not sweeten!”
-
-This is the day of the individual. Only you and I, as independent
-units, can right the wrongs that have beset our nation and the world.
-This is encouraging, isn’t it? Dean Russell tells us: “Fortunately
-for the cause of freedom, it is only as an individual that you or I
-can do anything at all. This is the voluntary way of accomplishing
-a desired objective. It is the only method that is in accord with
-freedom.” The opposite side of the coin is that people who have
-agreed to accept a bad idea band themselves together to force—by
-vote or otherwise—their ideas upon other people. It may all be
-perfectly legal, but it is dishonest. We are at perfect liberty to
-vote ourselves into serfdom. But it is very dangerous to believe that
-freedom automatically is safe because the individual vote has become
-so popular in America, where the “democratic” way prevails. When
-we vote money into our pockets, old age pensions, farm subsidies,
-price parities and a million other “props” to lean on, we are voting
-paralysis to our brains and slavery to our physical beings.
-
-It is a dangerous thing to do, but I would like to make one
-prediction. Each day we live we draw nearer to a climax in human
-history. The immediate future is dark. Bitter conflicts at home
-and abroad are on the horizon. I believe that the armies of all
-nations will, during the next two years, be drawn inevitably toward
-the countries in and around the Great Pyramid of Egypt. The crisis
-precipitated in Iran over the nationalization of her oil industry,
-makes this highly probable, in my opinion. Let me substantiate
-further.
-
-Toward the end of 1949, England received warning from Iran on this
-impending move, for she believed that only a violent act on her part
-could meet this extreme emergency. London correspondent Kenneth de
-Courcy, cabling to _Intelligence Digest_ on April 1, 1951, stated:
-
- “More than a year ago, a prominent Persian statesman gave Britain
- his final confidential warning. He said that only drastic action
- could save the situation. A Persian statesman flew to America and
- remained there for several days in an effort to lay all the facts
- before Mr. Truman. Attempt after attempt was made to arrange a
- meeting. The envoy, although carrying high credentials, was refused
- an interview. The Persian statesman had been one of his country’s
- most important and successful Prime Ministers. His prestige and
- influence were considerable....”
-
-De Courcy concluded:
-
- “The Persian situation has now been allowed to deteriorate to such
- an extent that no politician there dares oppose the popular movement
- which has been whipped up by the extremely clever work of Soviet
- agents. Some of the highest officials, moreover, are on Russia’s
- payroll, and this has been allowed to happen right under our noses.”
-
-On Saturday morning, June 2, 1951, the following headline appeared in
-_The Los Angeles Times_:
-
- “TRUMAN INTERVENES IN IRAN OIL ROW.” The Associated Press dispatch
- datelined Tehran, June 1, 1951, continued in part:
-
- “President Truman took a hand personally today in the
- British-Iranian oil dispute by sending letters to Premier Mohammed
- Mossadegh and Prime Minister Attlee reportedly urging moderation on
- both sides. The unusual move by the President indicated the extreme
- seriousness with which the U. S. government views the oil crisis.”
-
-A member of Iran’s Senate who declined to reveal his name, was quoted
-by _The Los Angeles Times_ article as saying:
-
-“Why should Truman belittle himself by sending such a message?”
-
-In my humble opinion, therefore, World War III began on June 25,
-1950. Our entry into it was two days later. There will be no peace,
-of any importance, as I see it, until 1953 or thereabouts. I say
-this with a heavy heart. This war that is so pointless and was so
-unnecessary, had its birth in our Administration’s betrayal of China.
-It will have its death on a bloody battlefield in Palestine.
-
-What a heritage we have, on the one hand, and what means for
-destruction on the other! How far we are today from Chaos, no man
-knows. It may be far later than we think. Until the time of greater
-enlightenment we know that a strong and forceful public opinion can
-be the result only of strong and forceful individual opinions. We
-are not, as yet, God-like creatures, but by making a supreme and
-prayerful effort we might become more nearly creatures like God. One
-small voice crying in the wilderness can be doubled and quadrupled
-into millions until, finally, it becomes the deafening roar of all
-freedom-loving peoples the world over.
-
-“The journey of a thousand miles,” the Chinese say, “begins with
-just one step.” If each of us will take that one step now, toward a
-better understanding of how to protect our country from its enemies,
-both within and without, America will remain the light to which the
-whole world turns in the blackness of its oppression. And let us each
-remember that, as individuals, “it is better to light one candle,
-than to curse the darkness.”
-
-In the words of our own beloved National Anthem:
-
- _“Oh! thus be it ever, when free men shall stand
- Between their loved homes and the war’s desolation!_
-
- _Blest with victory and peace, may the Heaven rescued land
- Praise the Power that hath made and preserved us a nation._
-
- _Then conquer we must, for our cause it is just,
- And this be our motto: ‘In God is our trust.’_
-
- _And the Star-Spangled Banner in triumph_ SHALL _wave
- O’er the land of the Free and the home of the Brave!”_
-
-
-
-
- EPILOGUE
-
- Deep in the Siberian mine,
- Keep your patience proud;
- The bitter toil shall not be lost,
- The rebel thought unbowed.
-
- The sister of misfortune, Hope,
- In the under-darkness dumb
- Speaks joyful courage to your heart:
- The day desired will come...
-
- The heavy-hanging chains will fall,
- The walls will crumble at a word;
- And Freedom greet you in the light,
- And brothers give you back the sword.
-
- ALEXANDER SERGEYEVICH PUSHKIN
-
-
-
-
- _Appendix_
-
- THE WEDEMEYER REPORT ON CHINA AND KOREA
-
- _Submitted to_
- THE PRESIDENT OF THE UNITED STATES
- _September 9, 1947_
-
- _by_
- ALBERT C. WEDEMEYER
- _Lieutenant General, United States Army_
-
- Paragraphs which have been deleted for security reasons
- are indicated by asterisks.
-
- [Illustration: Decoration]
-
-
- PART I—GENERAL STATEMENT
-
-China’s history is replete with examples of encroachment, arbitrary
-action, special privilege, exploitation, and usurpation of territory
-on the part of foreign powers. Continued foreign infiltration,
-penetration or efforts to obtain spheres of influence in China,
-including Manchuria and Taiwan (Formosa), could be interpreted only
-as a direct infringement and violation of China’s sovereignty and a
-contravention of the principles of the Charter of the United Nations.
-It is mandatory that the United States and those other nations
-subscribing to the principles of the Charter of the United Nations
-should combine their efforts to insure the unimpeded march of all
-peoples toward goals that recognize the dignity of man and his civil
-rights and, further, definitely provide the opportunity to express
-freely how and by whom they will be governed.
-
-Those goals and the lofty aims of freedom-loving peoples are
-jeopardized today by forces as sinister as those that operated in
-Europe and Asia during the ten years leading to World War II. The
-pattern is familiar—employment of subversive agents; infiltration
-tactics; incitement of disorder and chaos to disrupt normal economy
-and thereby to undermine popular confidence in government and
-leaders; seizure of authority without reference to the will of
-the people—all the techniques skillfully designed and ruthlessly
-implemented in order to create favorable conditions for the
-imposition of totalitarian ideologies. This pattern is present in
-the Far East, particularly in the areas contiguous to Siberia.
-
-If the United Nations is to have real effect in establishing economic
-stability and in maintaining world peace, these developments merit
-high priority on the United Nations’ agenda for study and action.
-Events of the past two years demonstrate the futility of appeasement
-based on the hope that the strongly consolidated forces of the Soviet
-Union will adopt either a conciliatory or a cooperative attitude,
-except as tactical expedients. Soviet practice in the countries
-already occupied or dominated completes the mosaic of aggressive
-expansion through ruthless secret police methods and through an
-increasing political and economic enslavement of peoples. Soviet
-literature, confirmed repeatedly by Communist leaders, reveals a
-definite plan for expansion far exceeding that of Nazism in its
-ambitious scope and dangerous implications. Therefore in attempting
-a solution to the problem presented in the Far East, as well as in
-other troubled areas of the world, every possible opportunity must be
-used to seize the initiative in order to create and maintain bulwarks
-of freedom.
-
-Notwithstanding all the corruption and incompetence that one notes
-in China, it is a certainty that the bulk of the people are not
-disposed to a Communist political and economic structure. Some
-have become affiliated with Communism in indignant protest against
-oppressive police measures, corrupt practices, and maladministration
-of National Government officials. Some have lost all hope for China
-under existing leadership and turn to the Communists in despair. Some
-accept a new leadership by mere inertia.
-
-Indirectly, the United States facilitated the Soviet program in the
-Far East by agreeing at the Yalta Conference to Russian re-entry into
-Manchuria, and later by withholding aid from the National Government.
-There were justifiable reasons for these policies. In the one case we
-were concentrating maximum Allied strength against the Japanese in
-order to accelerate crushing defeat and thus save Allied lives. In
-the other, we were withholding unqualified support from a government
-within which corruption and incompetence were so prevalent that it
-was losing the support of its own people. Further, the United States
-had not yet realized that the Soviet Union would fail to cooperate in
-the accomplishment of world-wide plans for postwar rehabilitation.
-Our own participation in those plans has already afforded assistance
-to other nations and peoples, friends and former foes alike, to a
-degree unparalleled in humanitarian history.
-
-Gradually it has become apparent that the World War II objectives for
-which we and others made tremendous sacrifices are not being fully
-attained, and that there remains in the world a force presenting even
-greater dangers to world peace than did the Nazi militarists and the
-Japanese jingoists. Consequently the United States made the decision
-in the Spring of 1947 to assist Greece and Turkey with a view to
-protecting their sovereignties, which were threatened by the direct
-or inspired activities of the Soviet Union. Charges of unilateral
-action and circumvention of the United Nations were made by members
-of that organization. In the light of its purposes and principles
-such criticism seemed plausible. The United States promptly declared
-its intention of referring the matter to the United Nations when that
-organization would be ready to assume responsibility.
-
-It follows that the United Nations should be informed of contemplated
-action with regard to China. If the recommendations of this report
-are approved, the United States should suggest to China that
-she inform the United Nations officially of her request to the
-United States for material assistance and advisory aid in order to
-facilitate China’s postwar rehabilitation and economic recovery.
-
-This will demonstrate that the United Nations is not being
-circumvented, and that the United States is not infringing upon
-China’s sovereignty, but contrary-wise is cooperating constructively
-in the interest of peace and stability in the Far East, concomitantly
-in the world.
-
-The situation in Manchuria has deteriorated to such a degree that
-prompt action is necessary to prevent that area from becoming a
-Soviet satellite. The Chinese Communists may soon gain military
-control of Manchuria and announce the establishment of a government.
-Outer Mongolia, already a Soviet satellite, may then recognize
-Manchuria and conclude a “mutual support agreement” with a _de
-facto_ Manchurian government of the Chinese Communists. In that
-event, the Soviet Union might accomplish a mutual support agreement
-with Communist-dominated Manchuria, because of her current similar
-agreement with Outer Mongolia. This would create a difficult
-situation for China, the United States and the United Nations.
-Ultimately it could lead to a Communist-dominated China.
-
-The United Nations might take immediate action to bring about
-cessation of hostilities in Manchuria as a prelude to the
-establishment of a Guardianship or Trusteeship. The Guardianship
-might consist of China, Soviet Russia, the United States, Great
-Britain and France. This should be attempted promptly and could
-be initiated only by China. Should one of the nations refuse to
-participate in Manchurian Guardianship, China might then request the
-General Assembly of the United Nations to establish a Trusteeship,
-under the provisions of the Charter.
-
-Initially China might interpret Guardianship or Trusteeship as an
-infringement upon her sovereignty. But the urgency of the matter
-should encourage a realistic view of the situation. If these steps
-are not taken by China, Manchuria may be drawn into the Soviet orbit,
-despite United States aid, and lost, perhaps permanently, to China.
-
-The economic deterioration and the incompetence and corruption in the
-political and military organizations in China should be considered
-against an all-inclusive background lest there be disproportionate
-emphasis upon defects. Comity requires that cognizance be taken of
-the following.
-
- Unlike other Powers since VJ-Day, China has never been free to
- devote full attention to internal problems that were greatly
- confounded by eight years of war. The current civil war has imposed
- an overwhelming financial and economic burden at a time when
- resources and energies have been dissipated and when, in any event,
- they would have been strained to the utmost to meet the problems of
- recovery.
-
- The National Government has consistently, since 1927, opposed
- Communism. Today the same political leader and same civil and
- military officials are determined to prevent their country from
- becoming a Communist-dominated State or Soviet satellite.
-
- Although the Japanese offered increasingly favorable surrender terms
- during the course of the war, China elected to remain steadfast with
- her Allies. If China had accepted surrender terms, approximately a
- million Japanese would have been released for employment against
- American forces in the Pacific.
-
-I was assured by the Generalissimo that China would support to the
-limit of her ability an American program for the stabilization of
-the Far East. He stated categorically that, regardless of moral
-encouragement or material aid received from the United States, he
-is determined to oppose Communism and to create a democratic form
-of government in consonance with Doctor Sun Yat-sen’s principles.
-He stated further that he plans to make sweeping reforms in the
-government including the removal of incompetent and corrupt
-officials. He stated that some progress has been made along these
-lines but, with spiraling inflation, economic distress, and civil
-war, it has been difficult to accomplish fully these objectives.
-He emphasized that, when the Communist problem is solved, he could
-drastically reduce the Army and concentrate upon political and
-economic reforms. I retain the conviction that the Generalissimo is
-sincere in his desire to attain these objectives. I am not certain
-that he has today sufficient determination to do so if this requires
-absolute overruling of the political and military cliques surrounding
-him. Yet, if realistic United States aid is to prove effective in
-stabilizing the situation in China and in coping with the dangerous
-expansion of Communism, that determination must be established.
-
-Adoption by the United States of a policy motivated solely toward
-stopping the expansion of Communism without regard to the continued
-existence of an unpopular repressive government would render any
-aid ineffective. Further, United States prestige in the Far East
-would suffer heavily, and wavering elements might turn away from the
-existing government to Communism.
-
-In China and Korea, the political, economic, and psychological
-problems are inextricably mingled. All of them are complex and
-are becoming increasingly difficult of solution. Each has been
-studied assiduously in compliance with your directive. Each will be
-discussed in the course of this report. However, it is recognized
-that a continued global appraisal is mandatory in order to preclude
-disproportionate or untimely assistance to any specific area.
-
-The following three postulates of United States foreign policy are
-pertinent to indicate the background of my investigations, analyses,
-and report:
-
- The United States will continue support of the United Nations in the
- attainment of its lofty aims, accepting the possible development
- that the Soviet Union or other nations may not actively participate.
-
- Moral support will be given to nations and peoples that have
- established political and economic structures compatible with our
- own, or that give convincing evidence of their desire to do so.
-
- Material aid may be given to those same nations and peoples in
- order to accelerate postwar rehabilitation and to develop economic
- stability, provided:
-
- That such aid shall be used for the purposes intended.
-
- That there is continuing evidence that they are taking effective
- steps to help themselves, or are firmly committed to do so.
-
- That such aid shall not jeopardize American economy and shall
- conform to an integrated program that involves other international
- commitments and contributes to the attainment of political,
- economic, and psychological objectives of the United States.
-
-
-
-
- PART II—CHINA
-
- POLITICAL
-
-Although the Chinese people are unanimous in their desire for
-peace at almost any cost, there seems to be no possibility of
-its realization under existing circumstances. On one side is the
-Kuomingtang, whose reactionary leadership, repression and corruption
-have caused a loss of popular faith in the government. On the other
-side, bound ideologically to the Soviet Union, are the Chinese
-Communists, whose eventual aim is admittedly a Communist state in
-China. Some reports indicate that Communist measures of land reform
-have gained for them the support of the majority of peasants in
-areas under their control, while others indicate that their ruthless
-tactics of land distribution and terrorism have alienated the
-majority of such peasants. They have, however, successfully organized
-many rural areas against the National Government. Moderate groups
-are caught between Kuomintang misrule and repression and ruthless
-Communist totalitarianism. Minority parties lack dynamic leadership
-and sizable following. Neither the moderates, many of whom are in
-the Kuomingtang, nor the minority parties are able to make their
-influence felt because of National Government repression. Existing
-provincial opposition leading to possible separatist movements would
-probably crystallize only if collapse of the government were imminent.
-
-Soviet actions, contrary to the letter and spirit of the Sino-Soviet
-treaty of 1945 and its related documents, have strengthened the
-Chinese Communist position in Manchuria, with political, economic
-and military repercussions on the National Government’s position
-both in Manchuria and in China proper, and have made more difficult
-peace and stability in China. The present trend points toward a
-gradual disintegration of the National Government’s control, with the
-ultimate possibility of a Communist-dominated China.
-
-Steps taken by the Chinese Government toward governmental
-reorganization in mid-April, 1947, aroused hopes of improvement
-in the political situation. However, the reorganization resulted
-in little change. Reactionary influences continue to mold
-important policies even though the Generalissimo remains the
-principal determinative force in the government. Since the April
-reorganization, the most significant change has been the appointment
-of General Chen Cheng to head the civil and militant administration
-in Manchuria. Projected steps include elections in the Fall for
-the formation of a constitutional government, but, under present
-conditions, they are not expected to result in a government more
-representative than the present regime.
-
-
- ECONOMIC
-
-Under the impact of civil strife and inflation, the Chinese
-economy is disintegrating. The most probable outcome of present
-trends would be, not sudden collapse, but a continued and creeping
-paralysis and consequent decline in the authority and power of the
-National Government. The past ten years of war have caused serious
-deterioration of transportation and communication facilities, mines,
-utilities and industries. Notwithstanding some commendable efforts
-and large amounts of economic aid; their overall capabilities
-are scarcely half those of the prewar period. With disruption of
-transportation facilities and the loss of much of North China and
-Manchuria, important resources of those rich areas are no longer
-available for the rehabilitation and support of China’s economy.
-
-Inflation in China has been diffused slowly through an enormous
-population without causing the immediate dislocation which would
-have occurred in a highly industrialized economy. The rural people,
-80 per cent of the total Chinese population of 450 millions, barter
-foodstuffs for local handicraft products without suffering a drastic
-cut in living standards. Thus, local economies exist in many parts of
-China, largely insulated from the disruption of urban industry. Some
-local economies are under the control of Communists, and some are
-loosely under the control of provincial authorities.
-
-The principal cause of the hyper-inflation is the long-continued
-deficit in the national budget. Present revenue collections, plus
-the profits of nationalized enterprises, cover only one-third of
-governmental expenditures, which are approximately 70 per cent
-military, and an increasing proportion of the budget is financed
-by the issuance of new currency. In the first six months of 1947
-note-issue was tripled but rice prices increased seven-fold. Thus
-prices and governmental expenditures spiral upwards, with price
-increases occurring faster than new currency can be printed. With
-further price increases, budget revisions will undoubtedly be
-necessary. The most urgent economic need of Nationalist China is a
-reduction of the military budget.
-
-China’s external official assets amounted to $327 million (US) on
-July 30, 1947. Privately-held foreign exchange assets are at least
-$600 million and may total $1500 million, but no serious attempt has
-been made to mobilize these private resources for rehabilitation
-purposes. Private Chinese assets located in China include probably
-$200 million in gold, and about $75 million in US currency notes.
-Although China has not exhausted her foreign official assets, and
-probably will not do so at the present rates of imports and exports
-until early 1949, the continuing deficit in her external balance of
-payments is a serious problem.
-
-Disparity between the prices of export goods in China and in world
-markets at unrealistic official exchange rates has greatly penalized
-exports, as have disproportionate increases in wages and other costs.
-Despite rigorous trade and exchange controls, imports have greatly
-exceeded exports, and there consistently has been a heavy adverse
-trade balance.
-
-China’s food harvests this year are expected to be significantly
-larger than last year’s fairly good returns. This moderately
-encouraging situation with regard to crops is among the few favorable
-factors which can be found in China’s current economic situation.
-
-Under inflationary conditions, long-term investment is unattractive
-for both Chinese and foreign capital. Private Chinese funds tends to
-go into short-term advances, hoarding of commodities, and capital
-flight The entire psychology is speculative and inflationary,
-preventing ordinary business planning and handicapping industrial
-recovery.
-
-Foreign business enterprises in China are adversely affected by
-the inefficient and corrupt administration of exchange and import
-controls, discriminatory application of tax laws, the increasing
-role of government trading agencies and the trend towards state
-ownership of industries. The Chinese Government has taken some steps
-toward improvement but generally has been apathetic in its efforts.
-Between 1944 and 1947, the anti-inflationary measure on which the
-Chinese Government placed most reliance was the public sale of gold
-borrowed from the United States. The intention was to absorb paper
-currency, and thus reduce the effective demand for goods. Under the
-circumstance of continued large deficits, however, the only effect of
-the gold sales program was to retard slightly the price inflation and
-dissipate dollar assets.
-
-A program to stabilize the economic situation was undertaken in
-February, 1947. The measures included a wage freeze, a system of
-limited rationing to essential workers in a few cities, and the sale
-of government bonds. The effect of this program has been slight, and
-the wage freeze has been abandoned. In August, 1947, the unrealistic
-official rate of exchange was replaced, for proceeds of exports
-and remittances, by a free market in foreign exchange. This step
-is expected to stimulate exports, but it is too early to determine
-whether it will be effective.
-
-The issuance of a new silver currency has been proposed as a future
-measure to combat inflation. If the government continued to finance
-budgetary deficits by unbacked note issue, the silver would probably
-go into hoards and the price inflation would continue. The effect
-would be no more than that of the gold sales in 1944-1947, namely,
-a slight and temporary retardation of the inflationary spiral. The
-proposal could be carried out, moreover, only through a loan from the
-United States of at least $200 million in silver.
-
-In the construction field, China has prepared plans for
-reconstruction of communications, mines and industries. Some
-progress has been made in implementing them, notably in the partial
-rehabilitation of certain railroads and in the textile industry.
-Constructive results have been handicapped by a lack of funds,
-equipment and experienced management, supervisory and technical
-personnel.
-
-On August 1, 1947, the State Council approved a “Plan for Economic
-Reform.” This appears to be an omnibus of plans covering all phases
-of Chinese economic reconstruction but its effectiveness cannot yet
-be determined.
-
-
- SOCIAL—CULTURAL
-
-Public education has been one of the chief victims of war and social
-and economic disruption. Schoolhouses, textbooks and other equipment
-have been destroyed and the cost of replacing my considerable portion
-cannot now be met. Teachers, like other public servants, have seen
-the purchasing power of a month’s salary shrink to the market value
-of a few days’ rice ration. This applies to the entire educational
-system, from primary schools, which provide a medium to combat the
-nation’s grievous illiteracy, to universities, from which must come
-the nation’s professional men, technicians and administrators. The
-universities have suffered in an additional and no less serious
-respect—traditional academic freedom. Students participating in
-protest demonstrations have been severely and at times brutally
-punished by National Government agents without pretense of trial or
-public evidence of the sedition charged. Faculty members have often
-been dismissed or refused employment with no evidence of professional
-unfitness, patently because they were politically objectionable to
-government officials. Somewhat similarly, periodicals have been
-closed down “for reasons of military security” without stated
-charges, and permitted to reopen only after new managements have
-been imposed. Resumption of educational and other public welfare
-activities on anything like the desired scale can be accomplished
-only by restraint of officialdom’s abuses, and when the nation’s
-economy is stabilized sufficiently to defray the cost of such vital
-activities.
-
-
- MILITARY
-
-The overall military position of the National Government has
-deteriorated in the past several months and the current military
-situation favors Communist forces. The Generalissimo has never
-wavered in his contention that he is fighting for national
-independence against forces of an armed rebellion nor has he been
-completely convinced that the Communist problem can be resolved
-except by force of arms. Although the Nationalist Army has a
-preponderance of force, the tactical initiative rests with the
-Communists. Their hit-and-run tactics, adapted to their mission of
-destruction at points or in areas of their own selection, give them
-a decided advantage over Nationalists, who must defend many critical
-areas including connecting lines of communication. Obviously large
-numbers of Nationalist troops involved in such defensive roles are
-immobilized whereas Communist tactics permit almost complete freedom
-of action. The Nationalists’ position is precarious in Manchuria,
-where they occupy only a slender finger of territory. Their control
-is strongly disputed in Shantung and Hopei Provinces where the
-Communists make frequent dislocating attacks against isolated
-garrisons.
-
-In order to improve materially the current military situation, the
-Nationalist forces must first stabilize the fronts and then regain
-the initiative. Further, since the government is supporting the civil
-war with approximately seventy per cent of its national budget, it
-is evident that steps taken to alleviate the situation must point
-toward an improvement in the effectiveness of the armed forces with
-a concomitant program of social, political and economic reforms,
-including a decrease in the size of the military establishment.
-Whereas some rather ineffective steps have been taken to reorganize
-and revitalize the command structure, and more sweeping reforms are
-projected, the effectiveness of the Nationalist Army requires a sound
-program of equipment and improved logistical support. The present
-industrial potential of China is inadequate to support military
-forces effectively. Chinese forces under present conditions cannot
-cope successfully with internal strife or fulfill China’s obligations
-as a member of the family of nations. Hence outside aid, in the form
-of munitions (most urgently ammunition) and technical assistance,
-is essential before any plan of operations can be undertaken with a
-reasonable prospect of success. Military advice is now available to
-the Nationalists on a General Staff level through American military
-advisory groups. The Generalissimo expressed to me repeatedly a
-strong desire to have this advice and supervision extended in scope
-to include field forces, training centers and particularly logistical
-agencies.
-
-Extension of military aid by the United States to the National
-Government might possibly be followed by similar aid from the Soviet
-Union to the Chinese Communists, either openly or covertly—the latter
-course seems more likely. An arena of conflicting ideologies might
-be created as in 1935 in Spain. There is always the possibility that
-such developments in this area, as in Europe and the Middle East,
-might precipitate a third world war.
-
-
- PART III—KOREA
-
- POLITICAL
-
-The major political problem in Korea is that of carrying out
-the Moscow Agreement of December, 1945, for the formation of a
-Provisional Korean Government to be followed by a Four-Power
-Trusteeship over Korea. The United States-Soviet Joint Commission,
-established in accordance with that Agreement, reached a deadlock
-in 1946 in the effort to implement the Moscow Agreement due to
-Soviet opposition to consultations with the Commission by all Korean
-democratic parties and social organizations, as provided for in
-that Agreement. Soviet motives have been to eliminate the extreme
-rightist groups in the United States zone from consultations and
-subsequently from participation in the new government thus ensuring
-a Communist-dominated government in Korea. Soviet objections to
-such consultations have been based on the rightist groups’ openly
-expressed opposition to trusteeship, while the United States has
-taken the position that to disqualify these groups would deprive a
-large section of the Korean people of an opportunity to express views
-regarding their government.
-
-A resumption of the Joint Commission meetings in May, 1947, following
-an exchange of notes between Secretary Marshall and Foreign Minister
-Molotov, resulted in a further deadlock on the same issue, although
-these notes had established a formula which would have permitted
-participation in consultation by the rightist groups in question.
-After the Soviet Government failed to reply to Secretary Marshall’s
-note of August 12, requesting the submission by the Commission of
-a joint status report or separate reports by each Delegation, the
-United States Delegation, on August 20, transmitted a unilateral
-report to Washington. An American proposal then made to China, the
-United Kingdom, and the Soviet Union for a Four-Power Conference to
-discuss Korea has been agreed to by China and the United Kingdom, but
-has been rejected by the Soviet Union.
-
-Internally, the Korean problem has been complicated by the Soviet
-establishment of a Communist regime in North Korea and by the
-machinations in South Korea of Communist groups, openly hostile to
-the United States.
-
- * * * * *
-
-The latter, in accordance with their directives, are endeavoring
-to turn over to Koreans as rapidly as possible full administrative
-responsibility in governmental departments. In consequence with this
-plan they have organized an interim Korean legislative assembly and
-in general, are striving to carry out a policy of “Koreanization” of
-government in South Korea.
-
-
- ECONOMIC
-
-South Korea, basically an agricultural area, does not have the
-overall economic resources to sustain its economy without external
-assistance. The soil depleted, and imports of food as well as
-fertilizer are required. The latter has normally come from North
-Korea, as have most of the electric power, timber, anthracite, and
-other basic products.
-
-The economic dependence of South Korea upon North Korea, and of Korea
-as a whole, in prewar years, upon trade with Japan and Manchuria,
-cannot be too strongly emphasized. Division of the country at the 38°
-North parallel and prevention of all except smuggling trade between
-North and South Korea have reduced the Korean economy to its lowest
-level in many years. Prospects for developing sizeable exports are
-slight. Food exports cannot be anticipated on any scale for several
-years, and then only with increased use of artificial fertilizer.
-South Korea’s few manufacturing industries, which have been operating
-at possibly 20 per cent of prewar production, are now reducing their
-output or closing down. In part this is a natural result of ten years
-of deferred maintenance and war-time abuse, but lack of raw materials
-and essential repair parts, and a gross deficiency of competent
-management and technical personnel are the principal factors.
-
-A runaway inflation has not yet occurred in South Korea, because
-the Military Government has restrained the issuance of currency by
-keeping governmental expenditures and local occupation costs at
-reasonable levels; because cannibalization and the use of Japanese
-stocks have kept some industries going; and because the forcible
-collection of rice at harvest time has brought in sufficient food
-to maintain—with imports provided by the United States—an adequate
-official ration in the cities. Highly inflationary factors such as
-the exhaustion of raw material stocks, cumulative breakdowns in
-public services and transportation, and the cutting of power supply
-from the North might occur simultaneously. The South Korean economic
-outlook is, therefore, most grave.
-
-A five-year rehabilitation program starting in July, 1948, and
-requiring United States financing at a cost of $647 million, has
-been proposed by the Military Government. A review of preliminary
-estimates indicates that the proposed annual rehabilitation cost
-would be substantially greater than the relief program of $137
-million which was tentatively approved for fiscal 1948, but later
-reduced to $92.7 million. These preliminary estimates of costs and
-the merits of individual projects need careful review. It is not
-considered feasible to make South Korea self-sustaining. If the
-United States elects to remain in South Korea, support of that area
-should be on a relief basis.
-
-
- SOCIAL—CULTURAL
-
-Since the Japanese were expelled, the Korean people have vehemently
-and unceasingly pressed for restoration of their ancient culture.
-There is particular zeal for public education. Individual and
-collective efforts to reduce illiteracy have produced results meeting
-the praise of American Military Government officials. There will be
-materially better results when there are more school buildings, more
-trained teachers and advisors, and many more textbooks in the Korean
-language. Current American activities aim at adult visual education
-on a modest but reasonably effective scale. South Korea’s health
-and public-welfare work are at present fully as effective as under
-Japanese administration and considerably more so in the prevention of
-serious diseases. Even the Koreans’ eagerness for improvement cannot
-immediately overcome the unquestionable need for large funds for
-social betterment.
-
-
- MILITARY
-
-The military situation in Korea, stemming from political and
-economic disputes which in turn are accentuated by the artificial
-barrier along the 38° North parallel, is potentially dangerous
-to United States strategic interests. Large-scale Communist
-inspired or abetted riots and revolutionary activities in the
-South are a constant threat. However, American forces supplemented
-by quasi-military Korean units are adequate to cope with such
-trouble or disorder except in the currently improbable event of an
-outright Soviet-controlled invasion. Whereas American and Soviet
-forces engaged in occupation duties in South Korea and North Korea
-respectively are approximately equal, each comprising less than
-50,000 troops, the Soviet-equipped and trained North Korean People’s
-(Communist) Army of approximately 125,000 is vastly superior to the
-United States-organized Constabulary of 16,000 Koreans equipped with
-Japanese small arms. The North Korean People’s Army constitutes a
-potential military threat to South Korea, since there is strong
-possibility that the Soviets will withdraw their occupation forces,
-and thus induce our own withdrawal. This probably will take place
-just as soon as they can be sure that the North Korean puppet
-government and its armed forces which they have created, are strong
-enough and sufficiently well indoctrinated to be relied upon to carry
-out Soviet objectives without the actual presence of Soviet troops.
-
-It appears advisable that the United States organize, equip, and
-train a South Korean Force, similar to the former Philippine Scouts.
-This force should be under the control of the United States military
-commander and, initially should be officered throughout by Americans,
-with a program for replacement by Korean officers. It should be
-of sufficient strength to cope with the threat from the North. It
-would counteract in large measure the North Korean People’s Army
-when American and Soviet forces are withdrawn from Korea, possibly
-preclude the forcible establishment of a Communist government, and
-thus contribute toward a free and independent Korea.
-
-
- PART IV—CONCLUSIONS
-
-The peaceful aims of freedom-loving peoples in the world are
-jeopardized today by developments as portentous as those leading to
-World War II.
-
-The Soviet Union and her satellites give no evidence of a
-conciliatory or cooperative attitude in these developments. The
-United States is compelled, therefore to initiate realistic lines of
-action in order to create and maintain bulwarks of freedom, and to
-protect United States strategic interests.
-
-The bulk of the Chinese and Korean peoples are not disposed to
-Communism and they are not concerned with ideologies. They desire
-food, shelter, and the opportunity to live in peace.
-
-
- CHINA
-
-The spreading internecine struggle within China threatens world
-peace. Repeated American efforts to mediate have proved unavailing.
-It is apparent that positive steps are required to end hostilities
-immediately. The most logical approach to this very complex and
-ominous situation would be to refer the matter to the United Nations.
-
-A China dominated by Chinese Communists would be inimical to the
-interests of the United States, in view of their openly expressed
-hostility and active opposition to those principles which the United
-States regards as vital to the peace of the world.
-
-The Communists have the tactical initiative in the overall military
-situation. The Nationalist position in Manchuria is precarious,
-and in Shantung and Hopei Provinces strongly disputed. Continued
-deterioration of the situation may result in the early establishment
-of a Soviet satellite government in Manchuria and ultimately in the
-evolution of a Communist-dominated China.
-
-China is suffering increasingly from disintegration. Her requirements
-for rehabilitation are large. Her most urgent needs include
-governmental reorganization and reforms, reduction of the military
-budget and external assistance.
-
-A program of aid, if effectively employed, would bolster opposition
-to Communist expansion, and would contribute to gradual development
-of stability in China.
-
-Due to excesses and oppressions by government police agencies basic
-freedoms of the people are being jeopardized. Maladministration
-and corruption cause a loss of confidence in the government. Until
-drastic political and economic reforms are undertaken United States
-aid cannot accomplish its purpose.
-
-Even so, criticism of results achieved by the National Government in
-efforts for improvement should be tempered by a recognition of the
-handicaps imposed on China by eight years of war, the burden of her
-opposition to Communism, and her sacrifices for the Allied cause.
-
-A United States program of assistance could best be implemented
-under the supervision of American advisors in specified economic
-and military fields. Such a program can be undertaken only if China
-requests advisory aid as well as material assistance.
-
-
- KOREA
-
-The situation in Korea, in its political, economic and psychological
-aspects, is strongly and adversely influenced by the artificial
-barrier of the 38° North parallel separating agricultural South Korea
-from the more industrialized North Korea.
-
-The South Korean economic position is grave. Agriculture is
-debilitated and there are few other resources.
-
-The establishment of a self-sustaining economy in South Korea is not
-feasible. Accordingly, United States aid should include a minimum of
-capital investment and should consist chiefly of items required for
-support on a relief basis.
-
-Korean Communist agents are creating unrest and fomenting disorder in
-South Korea.
-
- * * * * *
-
-Since the United States-Soviet Joint Commission meetings have
-twice ended in deadlock, and offer no real hope of success, the
-United Nations now seems to be the appropriate medium through which
-a Provisional Korean Government, functioning under a Four-Power
-Trusteeship, can be established.
-
-The United States may be confronted with a situation requiring
-decision concerning continued occupation in South Korea should the
-Soviet Union withdraw her occupation forces. This could reasonably be
-expected to occur when the Soviet-created puppet government and its
-armed forces are sufficiently well established to carry out Communist
-objectives without the presence of Soviet troops.
-
-The creation of an American controlled and officered Korean Scout
-Force, sufficient in strength to cope with the threat from the North,
-is required to prevent the forcible establishment of a Communist
-government after the United States and Soviet Union withdraw their
-occupation forces.
-
-
- PART V—RECOMMENDATIONS
-
-It is recommended:
-
-That the United States Government provide as early as practicable
-moral, advisory, and material support to China and South Korea in
-order to contribute to the early establishment of peace in the world
-in consonance with the enunciated principles of the United Nations,
-and concomitantly to protect United States strategic interests
-against militant forces which now threaten them.
-
-That United States policies and actions suggested in this report
-be thoroughly integrated by appropriate government agencies with
-other international commitments. It is recognized that any foreign
-assistance extended must avoid jeopardizing the American economy.
-
-
- CHINA
-
-That China be advised that the United States is favorably disposed
-to continue aid designated to protect China’s territorial integrity
-and to facilitate her recovery, under agreements to be negotiated
-by representatives of the two government, with the following
-stipulations:
-
- That China inform the United Nations promptly of her request to the
- United States for increasing material and advisory assistance.
-
- That China request the United Nations to take immediate action to
- bring about a cessation of hostilities in Manchuria and request that
- Manchuria be placed under a Five-Power Guardianship or, failing
- that, under a Trusteeship in accordance with the United Nations
- Charter.
-
- That China make effective use of her own resources in a program for
- economic reconstruction and initiate sound fiscal policies leading
- to reduction of budgetary deficits.
-
- That China give continuing evidence that the urgently required
- political and military reforms are being implemented.
-
- That China accept American advisors as responsible representatives
- of the United States Government in specified military and economic
- fields to assist China in utilizing United States aid in the manner
- for which it is intended.
-
-
- KOREA
-
-That the United States continue efforts for the early establishment
-of a Provisional Korean Government in consonance with the Moscow
-Agreement and meanwhile provide necessary support of the political,
-economic and military position of South Korea.
-
-
- APPENDIX E TO PART III—KOREA
-
- POLITICAL
-
-_Resumé of United States Policy Toward Korea_
-
-The first treaty between the United States and Korea, signed in 1882,
-provided that if other powers dealt unjustly or oppressively with
-either Government, the other would exert its good offices to bring
-about an “amicable agreement.” During the early period of United
-States-Korean relations the United States considered Korea as an
-independent state for the purposes of fulfilling treaty obligations,
-although that nation was actually under Chinese suzerainty. Prior to
-the Sino-Japanese War of 1895, when efforts were made to gain the
-support of the United States to avert war, the United States took
-the position that, while it stood for peace, it would do nothing
-which might cause it to assume responsibility for settlement of
-the dispute. Under the treaty ending the war, China relinquished
-suzerainty over Korea, which was in turn assumed by Japan. Therefore,
-the United States continued its policy of non-interference in Korean
-internal affairs and in 1899 denied a Korean request for American
-initiative in obtaining from the powers an agreement guaranteeing
-Korea’s integrity. At the time of the Russo-Japanese War of 1904-05,
-President Theodore Roosevelt stated that the United States could
-not intervene to preserve Korea’s integrity since the Koreans were
-unable “to strike one blow in their own defense.” When Japan forced
-the Korean Emperor to agree to Japanese control of the administration
-of Korean affairs, the Emperor appealed to the United States, under
-the good offices clause of the United States-Korean Treaty of 1882,
-but his appeal was denied. Nor did the United States protest Japanese
-formal annexation of Korea in 1910. Thus, with little or no effort
-on the part of the United States to oppose such a development, Korea
-passed from the suzerainty of China to that of Japan and thence
-to the status of a Japanese colony. Efforts of Korean exiles to
-introduce Korea’s case at the Paris Peace Conference and at the
-Washington Conference of 1921-22 were rebuffed, but these exiles
-continued their efforts to further the cause of Korean independence,
-some of them in the United States. With the outbreak of World War II,
-the question of Korean independence was revived and Korean exiles in
-the United States and China began to agitate for Korean independence
-and official recognition. At the Cairo Conference in 1943, agreement
-was reached by the participating powers, later adhered to by the
-Soviet Union, that Korea would become independent “in due course.”
-This phrase caused great resentment among the Koreans who felt that
-they should be given immediate independence upon the defeat of Japan.
-This resentment was increased when the decision was reached at the
-Moscow Conference in December, 1945, that Korea would be placed
-under a Four-Power Trusteeship (the Soviet Union, the United States,
-the United Kingdom, and China) for a period of up to five years.
-A tentative agreement in this regard had previously been reached
-between the United States and the Soviet Union, and when the end
-of the war was imminent agreement was reached between the United
-States, the Soviet Union, the United Kingdom, and China that Soviet
-forces accept the Japanese surrender in Korea north of the 38° North
-parallel, while the American forces would accept such surrender south
-of that line. This arbitrary line, originally serving as a marker
-of military responsibility, soon became a complete barrier to free
-movement between North and South Korea. It has resulted in separation
-of the country into two parts, an economically unstable division
-which has seriously blocked efforts to establish a unified Korea.
-
-
-_Current Political Situation_
-
-The major political problem in Korea is that of carrying out
-the Moscow Agreement of December, 1945, for the formation of a
-Provisional Korean Government. The United States-Soviet Joint
-Commission, established in accordance with that Agreement, held
-its first meeting March 8, 1946, but finally adjourned on May
-28, 1946, without having reached an agreement looking toward the
-implementation of the Moscow Agreement regarding Korea. The failure
-of the Joint Commission arose from the unwillingness of the Soviet
-Delegation to agree to consultation with the Commission of all
-Korean groups, as provided for in the Moscow agreement, to assist in
-the formation of the Provisional Korean Government. Soviet motives
-have been to eliminate the majority of the rightist groups in the
-American-occupied zone of Korea from consultation and subsequently
-from participation in the new government. Had the Soviet Delegation
-been successful the result would have been a Communist-dominated
-government in Korea. Soviet objections to consultation with these
-rightist groups have been based on the latter’s openly expressed
-opposition to trusteeship. The American Delegation has taken the
-stand that criticism of trusteeship did not disqualify Korean groups
-from participation in consultation, since to do so would deprive
-a considerable section of the Korean people of an opportunity to
-be heard in regard to the formation of the Provisional Korean
-Government. An exchange of notes between the Secretary of State
-and the Soviet Foreign Minister in April and May, 1947, resulted
-in a resumption of the meetings of the Joint Commission on May 21,
-1947, under a formula which provided for consultation by all Korean
-groups which were prepared to sign a declaration that they would
-not, after such signing, “foment or instigate active opposition”
-to the work of the Joint Commission or to the fulfillment of the
-Moscow Agreement. After repeated sessions of the Joint Commission a
-deadlock was again reached in July, the Soviet Delegation returning
-to its position of the previous year and the American Delegation
-insisting upon the implementation of the formula set forth in the
-Marshall-Molotov letters, which guaranteed wide-scale participation
-of Korean democratic parties and social organizations in consultation
-and freedom of expression of opinion by all Koreans. Further meetings
-of the Commission having produced no results, Secretary Marshall
-addressed another note to Foreign Minister Molotov on August 12,
-requesting that the Commission submit by August 21, 1947, a joint
-status report or that each Delegation submit separate reports. No
-reply having been received to this note and the Soviet Delegation
-refusing to participate in a joint report, the American Delegation
-on August 20 transmitted a unilateral report to Washington. Since
-the receipt of this report, the Secretary of State has addressed
-identical notes to China, the United Kingdom, and the Soviet Union
-proposing a Four Power Conference for a settlement of the Korean
-situation. China and the United Kingdom have indicated their
-willingness to participate in such a conference. The Soviet Union has
-declined.
-
-Internally, the Korean problem has been complicated by the Soviet
-establishment of a Communist state in North Korea and by its
-encouragement of the activities of Communist and Communist-dominated
-organizations in South Korea hostile to the United States.
-
- * * * * *
-
-The rightist groups are probably the best organized parties in South
-Korea. They command a majority of the Korean Interim Legislative
-Assembly and, if elections were held under present conditions would
-gain control of any government established in South Korea by such
-elections. The American authorities in South Korea are endeavoring
-to turn over to the Koreans as rapidly as possible administrative
-responsibility in the various departments of the United States
-Military Government, have organized a half-elected and half-appointed
-Korean Interim Legislative Assembly, and in general are striving to
-carry out a policy of “Koreanization” of government in South Korea.
-
-
-_Military Government Directive and Steps Taken to Implement Same_
-
-The Directive under which the United States Military Government now
-operates in Korea sets forth three basic United States objectives:
-(1) To establish an independent and sovereign Korea, free from
-all foreign domination and eligible for membership in the United
-Nations (2) to insure that the National Government so established
-shall be a democratic government fully representative of the freely
-expressed will of the Korean people; and (3) to assist the Koreans
-in establishing the sound economy and adequate educational system
-necessary for an independent democratic state. The Directive points
-out that the policy of the United States in regard to Korea, in
-accordance with the Moscow Agreement, contemplates the establishment
-of a Provisional Korean Government to assist the United States-Soviet
-Joint Commission in preparing Korea for self-government, the creation
-of some form of trusteeship for Korea under the United States, the
-United Kingdom, China, and the Soviet Union for a period of up to
-five years and the complete independence of Korea at the earliest
-possible moment, with subsequent membership in the United Nations.
-The Directive goes on to state that the American occupation of South
-Korea is for the purpose of facilitating the attainment of the
-basic American objectives in Korea and shall continue as long as it
-contributes to that end.
-
-As a result of Soviet obstruction and tactics designed to eliminate
-the majority of the rightist groups from participation in the
-new government to be established for all of Korea, the American
-military authorities in South Korea have been unable to proceed
-with the initial steps required for the establishment of a
-Provisional Korean Government. As required by the Directive, the
-American authorities have made considerable progress in utilizing
-qualified Koreans in posts in local and provincial administration
-and in the administration of the United States zones as a whole.
-American personnel remains in the provincial administrations only
-in an advisory capacity and all administrative posts are filled
-by Koreans. In the overall administration of South Korea, all
-Government departments are now headed by Korean officials and
-Americans are utilized only in an advisory capacity, although
-important controversial matters may be referred either to the United
-States Military Governor or the Commanding General of the United
-States Occupation Forces for final decision. American military
-personnel in the Military Government are being replaced as rapidly
-as possible by American civilians. A Korean Interim Legislative
-Assembly was established in December, 1946, half of its membership
-being selected by the United States Commanding General from a list
-of Koreans recommended by Korean groups and half being elected
-as representatives of the various provinces and municipalities.
-Presently under consideration by this Assembly is a program for
-land reform in South Korea and the Assembly has recently adopted
-a general election law providing for election of officials to an
-Interim South Korean Government according to certain stipulated rules
-and regulations. In accordance with the Directive, the United States
-military authorities have permitted full freedom of expression to
-all political groups, except in those cases when the activities of
-certain Communist-dominated groups were clearly prejudicial to the
-security of American military occupation.
-
- * * * * *
-
-In seeking to attain the cultural objectives set forth in the
-Directive, the United States occupational authorities have caused
-funds to be set aside for training courses in industry and
-agriculture, have encouraged the establishment of teacher training
-schools and of summer and winter institutes for the reeducation
-of teachers and have in general devoted their efforts to the
-restoration of schools, the enforcement of new system of education
-and expansion of school facilities. They have also encouraged the
-formation of various committees for the purpose of democratizing
-the Korean educational administration. The implementation of these
-programs has been handicapped by lack of funds. Culturally, as well
-as politically, efforts have been made to carry out a process of
-“Koreanization” looking toward a free and independent Korea.
-
-It should be pointed out that the Directive itself necessarily allows
-latitude of interpretation and execution and that the American
-authorities in Korea have functioned within the framework of that
-Directive.
-
- * * * * *
-
-Also, the failure to implement the badly needed land reform program
-has been due to the desire to await the unification of North and
-South Korea, at which time a Provisional Korean Government would be
-in a position to carry out a uniform program of this kind for the
-entire nation. Now that unification appears to be a matter for the
-indefinite future, plans are being made to carry out such a program
-at the earliest possible moment.
-
-
-_Obstructions to Realizations of United States Objectives_
-
-The chief obstructions to the realization of United States objectives
-in Korea have been the division of that country by the 38° North
-parallel barrier and the lack of Soviet cooperation in carrying out
-the provisions of the Moscow Agreement regarding Korea. Behind the
-38° North parallel the Soviet Union has established a Democratic
-Front Government modelled along Soviet lines and has eliminated
-all political parties of a non-Communist character. North Korean
-Communist groups have thus been able to encourage and assist the
-activities of the Democratic Front and other Communist-dominated
-leftist groups in South Korea hostile to the United States by the
-infiltration of agents from North Korea into the American zone
-of occupation. The Soviet refusal in the United States-Soviet
-Joint Commission to consult with all Korean political and social
-organizations, as the first step in the formation of a Provisional
-Korean Government, has so far made it impossible to realize American
-objectives in Korea—the establishment of a self-governing, sovereign
-Korea, independent of foreign control and fully representative of the
-freely expressed will of the Korean people.
-
-Other obstructions to the realization of American objectives in Korea
-have come from sources within the United States zone of occupation:
-
- * * * * *
-
-2. Similarly, extreme leftist groups have endeavored to foment
-hostility to the United States and opposition to the attainment of
-American objectives in Korea. Such groups have been particularly
-active among Korean peasants in opposing the rice collection program
-instituted by the United States Military Government for the purpose
-of ensuring sufficient food for the urban areas.
-
-
-_Implication of Withdrawal of All United States Assistance or
-Continuing Present United States Policy_
-
-The American occupation forces in Korea could not remain in that
-country if all assistance to South Korea were stopped, since the
-cessation of all aid would lead to an early economic breakdown and
-to the outbreak of riots and disorder throughout the United States
-zone of occupation. The withdrawal of American military forces
-from Korea would, in turn, result in the occupation of South Korea
-either by Soviet troops, or, as seems more likely, by the Korean
-military units trained under Soviet auspices in North Korea. The
-end result would be the creation of a Soviet satellite Communist
-regime in all of Korea. A withdrawal of all American assistance with
-these results would cost the United States an immense loss on moral
-prestige among the peoples of Asia; it would probably have serious
-repercussions in Japan and would more easily permit the infiltration
-of Communist agents into that country; and it would gain for the
-Soviet Union prestige in Asia which would be particularly important
-in the peripheral areas bordering the Soviet Union, thus creating
-opportunities for further Soviet expansion among nations in close
-proximity to the Soviet Union.
-
-Present American policy provides that, in view of the failure of the
-United States-Soviet Joint Commission to succeed in implementing
-the provisions of the Moscow Agreement regarding Korea, the matter
-be referred to the Four Powers for solution. It also provides that
-the matter be referred to the General Assembly of the United States
-in the event of the failure of the Four Powers to solve the Korean
-problem. This indicates that the United States will continue to seek,
-by consultation with the powers concerned, a solution of the problem,
-but a failure to reach an agreement on Korea in the United Nations
-will require that the United States make a decision regarding its
-future course in Korea: whether it shall withdraw or whether it shall
-organize a South Korean Government and under what conditions and
-whether it shall give economic and military aid to such a government.
-
-A continuation of present American policies will serve to give
-notice to the Soviet Union and to other nations in the Far East
-that the United States will not abandon Korea in the face of Soviet
-intransigence and that the United States will continue to insist upon
-the fulfillment of the Moscow Agreement regarding Korea.
-
-A continuation of present American policies will serve to deny to the
-Soviet Union direct or indirect control of all of Korea and prevent
-her free use of the entire nation as a military base of operations,
-including the ice-free ports in South Korea.
-
-
- APPENDIX F TO PART III—KOREA
-
- ECONOMIC
-
-South Korea has few resources except agricultural land. This area
-formerly obtained much of its anthracite, electric power, timber,
-fertilizer, and other chemical products from North Korea, and
-bituminous coal and food from Manchuria, but must now obtain these
-essential items (except electric power) as well as raw materials and
-repair parts for her industries, from other external sources.
-
-_Coal_—The whole of Korea, particularly South Korea, lacks coal No
-bituminous deposits are known and existing coal deposits are of
-a law-grade anthracite. The coal runs high in ash, and tends to
-disintegrate to powder. The largest producing mine in South Korea,
-constituting in fact 50 per cent of the production, is located at
-Sam Chok on the east coast. Production involves costly rail-sea-rail
-distribution. This coal can be and is being used in thermal plants
-by pulverizing and mixing with oil, but its use is costly and
-maintenance of boiler equipment is heavy. In any case, bituminous
-coal must be imported for the operation of the railways and most of
-the industries.
-
-_Electric Power_—Because of the unfavorable coal situation, South
-Korea is at the mercy of North Korea with respect to electric power
-because virtually all of the large hydroelectric installations are
-in North Korea. In 1945 there was a total of 1,240,000 kilowatts of
-installed capacity, 90 per cent of it hydroelectric and in North
-Korea. Some of the capacity in North Korea has been removed by the
-Russians. At the present time South Korea depends on North Korea
-sources for 75 per cent of its power requirements in the winter
-months when stream flow for its hydroelectric plants is low, and 50
-per cent to 60 per cent during the rainy summer months. Conditions
-will be critical during the coming winter. Minimum peak requirements
-are estimated at 200,000 kilowatts and only 110,000 kilowatts are
-in sight including the area’s own generating capacity of 60,000
-kilowatts—and that only if rehabilitation materials are received—plus
-50,000 kilowatts from North Korea, which is all the Russians profess
-to be able to deliver. If North Korea power were cut off, all
-industrial production in South Korea would have to be suspended,
-and remaining locally generated energy rationed for military and
-emergency use. Any new plants to correct this deficiency or permit
-any revival of industry would require four to five years to complete,
-and would still be dependent upon imported coal or oil, or upon a
-considerable expansion of the low quality anthracite production.
-There is no reasonable solution to this dilemma other than to unite
-North and South Korea.
-
-_Forestry_—The forest situation in South Korea is unfavorable. Before
-the war, effective programs of reforestation and erosion control were
-under way, but dining the war the annual cut averaged 168 million
-cubic feet as compared with annual estimated growth of only 113
-million cubic feet. Furthermore, over two-thirds of South Korean
-requirements of lumber, fuel wood, and pulp were formerly supplied by
-North Korea. With this source cut off and coal imports and production
-drastically reduced, hills and mountains around the Urge cities have
-been literally denuded. Unless North and South Korea are united or
-substantial imports are provided, the needs of South Korea for fuel
-wood, lumber, railroad ties, and telephone and telegraph poles, make
-it inevitable that overcutting and denuding of forest land in South
-Korea will continue, with resulting increased erosion and flood
-damage to agricultural land.
-
-_Mineral Resources_—Mineral resources of Korea are varied and rather
-extensive, but with a few exceptions are of low grade. There is a
-large deposit—over one billion metric tons—of low grade (35 per cent
-magnetic) iron ore at Musan in Northeastern Korea which the Japanese
-mined extensively before and during the war. Capacities are said to
-have been developed for the production of over 800,000 tons of pig
-iron and 350,000 tons of steel annually, but operations were possible
-only by large imports of bituminous coal from Manchuria and Japan.
-
-In both North and South Korea, gold and copper were also mined, the
-latter as an adjunct of the former, and some lead and zinc, and a
-large quantity of graphite, the latter, however, of low quality.
-There is enough developed tungsten production in South Korea to make
-it an important export commodity.
-
-_Industries_—The prospects for Korean industry, even in the event
-of early unification, are not bright. Before 1931 Japan exploited
-Korea primarily as a source of raw materials, rice and cheap labor.
-Thereafter Korea became Japan’s bridgehead to the Asiatic mainland,
-and with Manchuria, was developed as the mainland portion of
-Japan’s war potential. By 1938 there were 7,000 factories, mostly
-small, employing 183,000 workers, principally in the production
-of chemicals, textiles and processed foods. Main industrial
-concentrations were in the north, near hydroelectric power plants
-and the larger mineral deposits. This rather impressive industrial
-plant was not damaged by bombing, but it would be a mistake to assume
-therefore that Korea possesses a ready-made industrial plant which
-could quickly be turned to full and efficient peacetime operations.
-Production, at perhaps 20 per cent of capacity, was restored after
-the occupation, but output has dwindled as stocks of raw materials
-have been exhausted, and as machinery has stopped functioning
-for lack of spare parts and competent maintenance and operating
-personnel. The dearth of competent administrative supervisory and
-technical personnel, practically all of whom were formerly Japanese
-and are now evacuated, is the outstanding deficiency in Korean
-industries, power, and transportation systems. The unification of
-North and South Korea would make some of the required raw materials
-available, and spare parts may eventually be obtainable from Japan,
-but the serious deficiency of competent personnel is an unresolved
-problem.
-
-_Railways_—Korea has an excellent standard-gauge railway system
-including a double-track main line from Pusan on the southeast coast
-to Antung on the Manchurian border, which adequately serves the
-country with the exception of the eastern half of Kangwon Province.
-However, trackage, rolling stock except locomotives, and railway
-communications are badly in need of rehabilitation as a result of
-years of undermaintenance because of wartime shortages of materials.
-The railways in common with the country as a whole have been
-badly crippled by the evacuation of the Japanese administrative,
-supervisory, and technical personnel. The right-of-way is excellently
-engineered and constructed and characterized by a profusion of
-concrete and masonry structures, but all of the seven million ties
-in South Korea will require replacement within the next seven
-years, and quantities of rails and fishplates are also needed. One
-hundred and one new locomotives of the 2-8-0 type have been provided
-by the Military Government, but much of the other rolling stock
-requires overhaul. Railway communications also require considerable
-rehabilitation.
-
-_Highways_—There are no modern roads in Korea. The highways of South
-Korea are practically nonoperable for automotive traffic except from
-Seoul to Inchon, Kaisong, and Chunchon. Practically all supplies must
-be distributed throughout Korea by rail.
-
-_Shipping_—The only shipping of South Korea consists of eight Baltic
-vessels, and 12 LST’s, operated by the Military Government coast-wise
-and for some trade with Japan.
-
-_Ports_—There are two major ports in South Korea; Pusan, an excellent
-deep-water port with four large piers at the Southeast end of the
-peninsula, and Inchon, west of Seoul, a much smaller tidal-basin
-port which can accommodate four three-quarter-thousand-ton ships at
-dockside in the basin and larger trans-Pacific cargo and passenger
-vessels in the anchorage outside. Two other deep-water ports,
-Masan and Yosu, were mined and are little used at present. Mukko
-on the east coast is the export terminal for Sam Chok, the largest
-anthracite mining area in South Korea. The other ports of Mokpo,
-Pohang, Chinhae, and Kunsan are limited by unfavorable factors of
-nigh tidal range, and a lack of berths and port clearance facilities.
-
-In North Korea, there are two first-class warm water commercial and
-naval ports at Wonsan and Chungjin on the east coast, the latter
-particularly desirable from a Russian viewpoint, and other ports
-Oongki, Rashin, Eungjin, Chinnanpo, and Simhu, the latter two
-handicapped by the 25- to 30- foot tides of the Yellow Sea.
-
-
-_Withdrawal of Japanese Personnel_
-
-As disastrous in its effects on Korean economy as the division of
-Korea’s people and resources by the 38° North parallel, was the
-evacuation of all Japanese personnel, except 500 retained in North
-Korea, after VJ-Day. The 700,000 Japanese formerly resident in Korea
-dominated all elements of the economy and supplied management and
-technical personnel even to the mechanic class. Koreans were denied
-opportunities or positions of consequence in all phases of political
-and economic life. It is no reflection on the individuals concerned
-to note that a former Korean stationmaster at Pusan is now head of
-the railways, or that a vocational school graduate is in responsible
-charge of a large hydroelectric plant not far from Seoul. It is
-however, an indication of an almost fatal deficiency in South Korean
-economy. The ultimate solution is not readily apparent.
-
-
-_Disinvestment_
-
-The process of disinvestment probably began in South Korea during the
-late thirties when the Japanese decided to put all new capital into
-war production and permit nonwar facilities to depreciate. Capital
-goods provided by the Japanese for maintenance and development in
-South Korea went with few exceptions to war plants such as the
-submarine shop at Pusan, and to the strategic transport services
-linking Japan with the Manchuria-North Korea industrial complex.
-This meant that facilities such as the north-south railroad from
-Pusan to Antung on the Manchurian border received the main portion
-of construction materials available. Other industrial establishments
-in South Korea were converted to war production or allowed to
-deteriorate. The supply of fertilizer, essential to rice culture in
-the exhausted paddies of South Korea, was drastically reduced in the
-early forties as a result of the conversion of North Korean nitrogen
-fixation plants to the manufacture of explosives. Exploitation of
-South Korea’s meager forest resources resulted in severe erosion and
-the destruction of crops and utilities through flooding The Japanese
-also depleted Korean stock-piles and withdrew skilled labor for Army
-service, or for the mines and factories of Manchuria and the Japanese
-islands. During two years of military government, the process of
-disinvestment has continued.
-
-The possibility of South Korea financing a program of investment
-and rehabilitation out of the proceeds of exports is not worth
-considering in detail. Although South Korea is primarily
-agricultural, it is unlikely that it will be able to export
-foodstuff, even under the most favorable circumstances. Deterioration
-of agriculture, due to accumulated soil deficiencies and erosion,
-and an increase of population from 15 to 20 million since 1940
-indicate that no export surplus of food can be expected in the next
-several years. The only exports which may be derived from South Korea
-are small amounts of such minerals as tungsten, gold and copper,
-some ginseng root, and marine products such as agar-agar. The most
-optimistic estimate is $10 million worth of exports by 1950. Much
-more than $10 million earned by Korean exports will be needed to
-finance essential raw material imports, and there is no prospect of
-any capital development out of current production.
-
-
-_Inflation_
-
-The Korean inflation is not as serious as the Chinese inflation
-in rate of price increase, but its causes are less susceptible to
-control by measures taken within Korea. Price increases have been
-due to physical inability to produce goods, and not to unrestrained
-issuance of paper currency. Prices of consumers’ goods in various
-categories have risen 200 to 700 times over the 1937 level. The
-official rise price, however, has risen only 70 times, and about
-80 per cent of the calorie requirement for the urban population
-is available at the official price. A runaway inflation has not
-yet occurred in South Korea, because (_a_) the Military Government
-has restrained the issuance of currency by keeping governmental
-expenditures and local occupation costs at reasonable levels, and
-(_b_) because cannibalization and the use of Japanese stocks have
-kept some industry going, and (_c_) the forcible collection of rice
-at harvest time has brought in sufficient food to maintain, with
-“disease an unrest” imports, an adequate official ration in the
-cities without the use of large inflationary payments to the farmers.
-Highly inflationary factors such as the exhaustion of raw material
-stocks, cumulative breakdowns in public services and transportation,
-and the cutting of power supply from the North, might occur
-simultaneously. The Korean economic outlook is, therefore, more grave
-than in China or Japan, where governmental fiscal policies as well as
-low production, are the main causes of inflation. Korea, lacking raw
-materials and skilled labor, is not in a position to be saved from
-a disastrous and chaotic hyper-inflation by the efforts of its own
-people combined with correct policy decisions. A breakdown could be
-forestalled only by external provision of large amounts of consumers’
-goods and transportation equipment.
-
-
-_Agriculture and Fisheries_
-
-_Agriculture_—Over three-quarters of the total population of South
-Korea are farmers. The total area of land under cultivation in
-1946 was 6,033,000 acres, or about 2½ acres per farm household.
-Approximately 15 per cent of agricultural land was formerly owned by
-Japanese, but title thereto remains with the Military Government and
-will eventually pass to Koreans. In the projected land reforms an
-additional 60 per cent of land, which is tenant-operated, would be
-involved. The Military Government has not proceeded with land reform
-even with regard to Japanese-held land, in the view that such reform
-should not precede establishment of an interim Korean Government.
-
-After VJ-Day the influx of over two and a half million Koreans from
-Japan, China, and North Korea into South Korea, coupled with almost
-complete lack of commercial fertilizers as well as severe floods,
-resulted in a severe food shortage. Farmers have been reluctant to
-double-crop soils already depleted because of a lack of fertilizer,
-and have preferred to conserve land for rice, the best money crop. In
-1946 the average planted acreage was only 79 per cent of the 1935-39
-average, and production of grains and pulses was only 71 per cent.
-
-In the past, about 36 per cent of the population and 36 per cent
-of the food production of Korea were located north of the 38°
-North parallel. However, postwar population movements, plus the
-availability of more commercial fertilizers in North Korea (where
-almost all of Korea’s large chemical plants are located), has changed
-this situation. Only about 30 per cent of Korea’s population is now
-north of the 38° North parallel, but that area accounts for around 38
-per cent of food production.
-
-Rice is the principal Korean crop, and it has consistently
-represented more than half the total value of agricultural
-production. During the 1930’s the rice crop averaged about
-100,000,000 bushels annually. Forty per cent or more was exported
-each year to Japan accounting generally for about one-third of the
-total gross value of exports. This was by no means voluntary on
-the part of the Korean people. In line with Japanese policy, farm
-tenancy increased from less than 40 per cent in 1910 to more than 75
-per cent in 1945. This facilitated grain collections, for landlords
-usually received their rentals in rice, and these averaged about 60
-per cent of the crop. Consequently, although Koreans preferred rice
-to other grains, their per capita consumption was forced down from
-3.62 bushels in 1915-19 to 2.0 bushels in 1939-45, a decline of 44
-per cent. This deficiency was partly made up by imports of Manchurian
-millet and soya beans, but underconsumption was nevertheless chronic.
-
-To meet the food crisis in South Korea and to rehabilitate
-agriculture the Military Government developed program to import
-foodstuffs to prevent starvation and to assure Korean urban residents
-at least a subsistence diet until indigenous production could be
-increased to meet minimum food needs; and a fertilizer import
-program designed to restore depleted soils and increase agricultural
-production to levels at least as high as had been reached in the past.
-
-In 1945 the Military Government’s attempt to institute a compulsory
-system of rice collection for rationing to non-self-suppliers was
-largely unsuccessful. In 1946, a poor crop year due to floods, the
-Military Government collected 87,428 tons of rice, or about one-sixth
-of the total production. In order to supplement indigenous production
-to meet the minimum needs of non-self-suppliers in South Korea,
-180,848 metric tons of wheat, corn, and flour were imported into
-South Korea by the Military Government from May through December,
-1946.
-
-A program for the collection of the rice in 1946 was given highest
-priority by the Military Government, as one of the most important
-ways to ease the food situation, stabilize the economy, and check
-the inflationary spiral. This program was fully supported by all
-agencies, and it succeeded in collecting a total of 548,000 metric
-tons of polished rice, or its equivalent, about 30 per cent of the
-total 1946 production.
-
-This successful collection program, coupled with the importation of
-275,962 metric tons of cereals purchased with U. S. funds during the
-first seven months of 1947, has enabled the Military Government to
-stabilize the food situation in South Korea through the issuance to
-non-self-suppliers of minimum staple rations averaging slightly over
-300 grams (1,050 calories) per person per day.
-
-_Fisheries_—Fishing was one of the important prewar Korean
-industries, ranking sixth in the world. It is second in importance,
-only to agriculture in the economic structure of the country. The
-industry was, however, largely dependent upon Japan for imports of
-fisheries supplies and, has deteriorated seriously since this source
-has been cut off. Consumption of fish products has decreased from
-a prewar average of 47 pounds per capita per year to 32 pounds.
-Korea needs additional fisheries supplies, boats, manila line, nets,
-trawls, ammonia for refrigeration, tin plate for canning, salt and
-sugar for canning. Fears are expressed that if such supplies are
-not forthcoming and fishing operations considerably expanded, the
-Japanese will enter claims for fishing grounds now reserved for the
-Koreans.
-
-
-_Foreign Trade_
-
-The total volume of Korea’s external trade grew from 660,000,000 yen
-in 1910 to more than 2,400,000,000 yen in 1939. With respect to the
-principal categories of its trade, i. e., foodstuffs, textiles and
-fibres, minerals, manufactures, and miscellaneous items. Korea was
-consistently a net importer; of all, except for foodstuffs. Food
-exports however, were seldom so large that they did more than offset
-imports of textiles and fibers.
-
-From 1910 to 1945, Korea’s external trade was almost wholly absorbed
-by the Japanese Empire and the prime factor during the entire
-period was the export of rice to Japan. In 1936, of the value of 41
-Korean products showing a net export balance, rice accounted for
-approximately 64 per cent. Although by 1939 the relative importance
-of rice exports had declined in favor of minerals and manufactures,
-of the 55 net export products in that year, rice still made up
-one-third of the total money value. Until the years immediately
-preceding the war, fish and marine products ranked second to
-rice, averaging from 7.5 per cent to 9 per cent of all net export
-commodities. Other exports individually were of minor significance.
-Korea’s principal imports historically have reflected its dependence
-on the outside world for fuels, heavy manufacturers, machinery,
-automotive equipment, textiles, and fibers, and specialized products.
-
-Under current conditions, foreign trade in the ordinary sense of
-the term is small in amount. During the period August 15, 1945,
-through June 30, 1947, the value of goods entering or leaving the
-area was approximately $168,000,000. Of this sum, however, only about
-$25,000,000 represents the value of goods exchanged between Korea
-and the mainland of Asia as a result of the operations of private
-traders. The remaining $143,000,000 represents mainly commodities
-imported by agencies of the United State Government as a part of the
-Civilian Supply Program and financed with appropriated funds of the
-War Department, or as shipments made under the $25,000,000 UNRRA
-supplies. Exports which enter into this figure are surplus Foreign
-Liquidation Commission credit, plus small amounts of government-owned
-minerals and marine products, to the value of some $5,000,000.
-
-The Military Government is endeavoring to encourage such trade as
-will reduce the area’s dependence upon American funds. Credits
-realized from South Korea exports, unless balanced in kind by imports
-approved as essential, are to be used to purchase commodities similar
-to those making up the Civilian Supply list and certified for import
-by the Military Government. On July 15, 1947, Korea was declared open
-to small numbers of foreign businessmen, who might desire to develop
-trade possibilities within the framework established by the military
-authorities. Meanwhile, trade has been undertaken with Hong Kong and
-Macao, and some critically needed materials have been obtained by
-barter in exchange for Korean surpluses. Recent negotiations with the
-Egyptian government have led to an agreement to exchange 730 tons of
-tungsten concentrates for 3,000 bales of long-staple Egyptian cotton.
-
-All dealings with Japan are restricted to a governmental level, and
-China has imposed conditions which make legitimate trade virtually
-out of the question. Actually, a growing smuggling trade is going
-on both with Japan and China, and via Hong Kong and Macao. An
-essential step for promoting Korea’s trade on a sound basis would be
-development of an efficient customs service.
-
-
-_United States Investment in Rehabilitation_
-
-There is one basic policy question which overhangs all financial and
-economic programs for Korea: How long will the occupation of South
-Korea continue on a unilateral basis? Until this question is answered
-in terms of months or years, no satisfactory decision can be made on
-United States financial or developmental programs for the area. The
-characteristics of the South Korean economy are such that there is
-no compromise which provides effective utilization of dollars, and
-at the same time leaves open the decision concerning the duration
-of the occupation. If a serious decline in the living standard, and
-possibly economic disintegration are to be avoided, South Korea must
-have (_a_) unification with North Korea, or (_b_) substantial relief
-supplies, or (_c_) relief and rehabilitation supplies of $200 to $300
-million a year for several years. The third alternative would provide
-a possible basis for an indefinite continuance of occupation. The
-capital investment in a permanently separate South Korea would be
-wasteful, and the likelihood of a stable economy resulting therefrom
-would be in doubt for some years. South Korea is a depleted and
-eroded country with no minerals worth mentioning; an agriculture
-dependent on nitrate input, and a backward people. In terms of the
-needs of the East Asia area, an investment in rehabilitation and
-industrialization, which would permit South Korea to subsist on its
-own industrial output at its standards of the past 10 years with a
-minimum of relief, could be justified only by political and strategic
-consideration of the highest order.
-
-A consideration affecting the duration of the occupation of Korea,
-and hence the type of economic program, is the estimated length of
-the occupation in Japan. General MacArthur has indicated his desire
-for a United Nations, or other international administration to take
-responsibility in Japan soon after the peace treaty is signed.
-There would be obvious difficulties in any long-term occupation and
-rehabilitation program for South Korea, initiated at a time when
-the occupation of Japan was about to be relinquished by the United
-States. Apart from the problem of tactical forces in Japan to back
-up the Korean occupation, there would be communication and supply
-problems. There might he political objection to the occupation of
-liberated Korea after the termination of occupation in defeated Japan.
-
-The United States Military Government in Korea has recommended
-a five-year rehabilitation program starting in July, 1948, and
-requiring U. S. financing for a deficit of $647 million. The
-estimates indicate that the proposed rehabilitation of the Korean
-economy would cost more per year for the first three years, than the
-relief program of $137 million which was tentatively approved for
-fiscal 1948, but reduced in July, 1947, to $92.7 million.
-
-A feature of the proposed rehabilitation program is an expenditure
-of $35 million to provide a chemical fertilizer industry and the
-supporting power installations, roughly duplicating the installations
-in North Korea which formerly supplied the fertilizer needs of
-South Korea. An additional amount of approximately $85 million
-is included in the five-year rehabilitation program to cover the
-cost of fertilizer imports, pending the completion of the plants.
-Other items in the program are investment in coal mining to provide
-low-grade anthracite for briquetting, and to provide for the
-development and reconstruction of the transportation, textile and
-fisheries industries. There is no assurance, however, that (_a_) $35
-million fertilizer industry would meet the estimated requirements,
-or reach capacity production in the time allotted. The suitability
-of low-grade anthracite dust as the basic energy source for a
-considerable industrial establishment in South Korea has not been
-tested, and (_b_) there are no reliable estimates of the reserves of
-this fuel, and no evidence of this fuel, and no evidence that the
-mines and railroads could be developed to fit the prescribed time
-schedule.
-
-In the event that it is decided to continue a one-nation occupation
-of South Korea for some years, the least costly program would be
-one designed to provide, not capital goods, but raw materials and
-fertilizer in sufficient quantity to stabilize the economy at a
-satisfactory standard of living as measured by a prewar Japanese and
-potential North Korean living standards. In this way, the risk of an
-experiment in industrialization without resources would be avoided.
-
-A relief program of the type envisaged might cost the United States
-about $150 million a year, in addition to the present military
-occupation costs which are in the neighborhood of $200 million a
-year. It would be necessary frankly to recognize this as a relief
-program which held no prospect of financial return, and no prospect
-of making South Korea a self sufficient economy.
-
-
-_Industrial Survey_
-
-A comprehensive industrial survey of South Korea would not be
-warranted. The industrial elements and capabilities as well as
-weaknesses of that area are all too evident. Should Korea be
-reunited, and the United States bear a responsibility in the economic
-rehabilitation of the country, an industrial survey wholly or in
-part by qualified United States Government personnel is indicated.
-If, however, it be made by private consultants, they should clearly
-understand that the survey must be realistic and reflect the economic
-needs and capabilities of the country. Foreign consultants and
-construction firms do themselves and their own country as well as the
-country concerned, a disservice in recommending projects for which
-there is not complete economic justification.
-
-
- APPENDIX G TO PART III—KOREA
-
- SOCIAL AND CULTURAL
-
-Because Japan had administered and developed Korea uniformly for
-Japanese and not Korean purposes, and in particular had persistently
-suppressed the people’s historic culture, once the region was freed
-of the Japanese, its people undertook a re-Koreanization program
-with feverish activity. Since VJ-Day, their own labors in behalf of
-education, for example, apart from the contributions of American
-authorities have been determined and surprisingly effective. In that
-short time it is estimated that total illiteracy has been cut from 75
-to 44 per cent (to 25 per cent in a most favored area), a commendable
-record even when one notes warningly that the degree of literacy thus
-attained is necessarily a modest one permitting little more in some
-cases than ability to read a ballot. Although there are today more
-children in school in South Korea than were in school in all Korea
-during the Japanese rule, popular education is but begun, whether
-one considers primary or secondary schooling. Its advancement calls
-for buildings, texts and other equipment, teachers and advisors, and
-these requirements call for money.
-
-The program of the educational group in our own Military Government
-is well designed but promoted within tight financial limits The same
-can be said for adult educational work of the United States Office
-of Civil Information. It operates through local libraries whose
-pictures, posters, periodicals, and other exhibits reach a great many
-urban visitors, and through a special train which moves periodically
-among the villages, presenting well-attended educational picture
-shows and distributing eagerly read farm weeklies and newspapers. Of
-many lacks the worst is of picture films.
-
-Korean newspapers are numerous but for the most part are primarily
-political organs. Only by hastening education in the Korean language,
-long suppressed by Japan, can there be prompt development of adult
-education; there is present need for increased educational and
-cultural activities to occupy the attention of young people who
-presently have insufficient employment.
-
-American health advisers report good progress in prevention of such
-serious diseases as smallpox and typhus, scant progress in the fight
-on chronic maladies. Institutional welfare work is insufficient but
-no more so than under Japan.
-
-In general, one notes abundant energy among Korean leaders and a
-great desire for mass improvement socially and culturally as well as
-in other fields; it merits greater financial encouragement than thus
-far has been available.
-
-
- APPENDIX H TO PART III—KOREA
-
- THE MILITARY SITUATION IN KOREA AND PROPOSED MILITARY AID
-
-
-_Military Situation_
-
-In September, 1945, United States Army Forces, pursuant to
-instructions contained in General Order Number 1 of the Supreme
-Commander Allied Powers, occupied Korea south of the 38° North
-parallel and accepted the surrender of Japanese troops south of that
-line. This arbitrary line of demarcation between the United States
-and Soviet Union occupation areas rapidly became a complete barrier
-to free movement between agricultural South Korea and the more
-industrialized North Korea. Numerous disputes and incidents, mostly
-political or economic, continue to take place even after two years of
-occupation.
-
-The Commander in Chief, Far East, has delegated military
-responsibility and authority for occupation of South Korea to
-Lieutenant General John R. Hodge, Commanding General of the XXIV
-Corps. This Corps of two divisions totals 41,000 United States troops
-and constitutes the American Occupational Force in Korea.
-
-There are no South Korean Armed Forces to augment these American
-occupational troops. There are, however, three authorized Korean
-uniformed elements or quasi-military forces: the National Police with
-a strength of 28,000, the Constabulary with 16,000, and the Korean
-Coast Guard with 3,000. These forces may be expected to remain loyal
-to the United States Military Government in the event of emergency.
-The National Police Force is the agency for enforcing law and order
-in Korea and is organized into district and subdistrict headquarters
-with police stations in principal towns and villages.
-
- * * * * *
-
-The Constabulary is similar in purpose to the National Guard of the
-United States in that it is used to back up the police in event of
-major disorders. At present, the Constabulary is also being utilized
-to augment American guards on United States Army installations.
-It is armed with captured Japanese rifles and small arms, and its
-efficiency is low by American standards.
-
-North of the 38° North parallel, the estimated Soviet troop strength
-in Korea is approximately 45,000. These forces are organized into
-two major units, the 40th Rifle Division and the 19th Mechanized
-Division, plus complementary air, naval, and service support. There
-is evidence of further Soviet withdrawal now underway. An accurate
-figure denoting the Soviet-trained and equipped North Korean People’s
-(Communist) Army in its overall structure has not yet been obtained
-but the figure of 125,000 troops has been generally accepted. These
-forces assist Soviets in control of the border, maintain liaison with
-Chinese Communists in Manchuria, and constitute a potential military
-threat to South Korea.
-
-Current political and economic unrest in Southern Korea is aggravated
-by Communistic terrorism, and by Communist-inspired riots and
-revolutionary activities in the occupied area. Such disorders impose
-additional military burdens on the police, the constabulary, and the
-American Occupation Forces. In addition, there is a possibility,
-however remote, of a Soviet-inspired invasion of South Korea by
-troops of the North Korean People’s (Communist) Army. Recent reports
-from Manchuria indicate that sizable elements of Korean troops
-are operating with Chinese Communists, possibly to acquire battle
-conditioning. Furthermore there is evidence that Soviet officers and
-equipment are being used to groom the Korean Army.
-
-Although it is extremely doubtful that the Soviets or their North
-Korean satellites would invade South Korea in the near future,
-infiltration of Communists and of large numbers of the North Korean
-Army, in connection with large-scale Communist-inspired or abetted
-riots or revolts in the South, is always a dangerous threat. Should
-this occur, the forces available should be adequate for maintaining
-order under any circumstances except for an outright Soviet directed
-or controlled invasion.
-
-
-_Strategic Importance_
-
-The political, social, economic, and military situations in South
-Korea are inextricably mingled. A Soviet-dominated Korea would
-constitute a serious political and psychological threat to Manchuria,
-North China, the Ryukyus, and Japan, and hence to United States
-strategic interests in the Far East. It is therefore in the best
-interest of the United States to ensure the permanent military
-neutralization of Korea. Neutralization can only be assured by its
-occupation until its future independence as a buffer state is assured.
-
-So long as Soviet troops remain in occupation of North Korea, the
-United States must maintain troops in South Korea or admit before the
-world an “ideological retreat.” The military standing of the United
-States would decline accordingly; not only throughout the Far East,
-but throughout the world. Withdrawal of United States Occupation
-Forces from Korea would result in a growing unrest among the Japanese
-people because of their uncertainty regarding future United States
-policy in the Far East, and their consequent fears of expanding
-Soviet influence. This might well increase occupational requirements
-for Japan.
-
-Except as indicated above, and the fact that its occupation denies
-a potential enemy the use of warm-water ports and the opportunity
-to establish strong air and naval bases in the peninsula, the
-United States has little military interest in maintaining troops or
-bases in Korea. In the event of major hostilities in the Far East,
-present forces in Korea would most likely be a military liability
-as they could not be maintained there within our present military
-capabilities.
-
-There are three possible courses of action with reference to United
-States Occupation Forces in Korea:
-
-They may be withdrawn immediately, which would abandon South Korea
-to the Soviet Union through pressures which could be exerted by
-the North Korea People’s (Communist) Army and is therefore an
-unacceptable course from the strategic viewpoint.
-
-They may remain in occupation indefinitely, which course would be
-unacceptable to the American public after Soviet withdrawal, and
-would subject United States to international censure.
-
-They may be withdrawn concurrently with Soviet occupation forces.
-
-Soviet forces in Northern Korea will not be withdrawn until the North
-Korean puppet government and armed forces which they have created
-are strong enough and sufficiently well indoctrinated to be relied
-upon to carry out Soviet objectives without the actual presence of
-Soviet troops. One of these Soviet objectives will undoubtedly be
-to obtain control of South Korea by utilization of Communist Korean
-armed forces as a means of pressure after withdrawal of United
-States forces, as was done in the cases of Poland, Outer Mongolia,
-Yugoslavia, and Albania.
-
-There appears to be a strong possibility that Soviet Russia will
-withdraw its occupational forces when such conditions are favorable
-and thus induce our own withdrawal.
-
-
-_Military Aid to Korea_
-
-The Military Government in Korea, which is currently being turned
-over to American and Korean civilians, is the only government in
-South Korea. The immediate and primary objectives of the American
-Military Commander in Korea are to maintain law and order in the
-face of subversive uprisings in the American zone, to care for
-and safeguard American noncombatants and property, and to operate
-a military government which looks toward the future political
-independence of Korea together with its economic and social
-rehabilitation. In view of these objectives, the immediate purpose
-of any American military aid to Korea should be to facilitate their
-realization.
-
-The long-term purpose of military aid to Korea should be to enable
-South Korea, and later all Korea, to engage in a holding operation
-against the progressive expansion of militaristic Communism. Minimum
-military aid to Southern Korea therefore should envisage the support
-of the uniformed elements of Korean military and quasi-military
-forces through the furnishing of United States equipment including
-carbines and some light machine guns as well as furnishing vehicles,
-telephone and radio communications, etc., and training advice.
-
-Consideration was given by the Mission to the organization, training,
-and equipping of a strong Korean military force along the lines
-of the former Philippine Scouts. This force should be under the
-control of the United States Military Commander, initially should be
-officered throughout by Americans, but with a program for replacement
-and understudy by Korean officers, and should be of sufficient
-strength to cope with the threat from the north. Such a force will
-become truly effective only if the United States Commander in Korea
-is given clear-cut authority to establish and control it.
-
-Because of its occupation by two nations of radically differing
-ideologies and policies, and the corresponding separation into two
-parts economically, there is little that Korea, even as a liberated
-nation, can do to improve its situation. South Korea lacks the
-experience and industrial potential to create or support its own
-armed forces.
-
-An American organized and equipped Korean military force would serve
-to counteract in large measure the North Korean People’s (Communist)
-Army when the American and the Soviet forces are withdrawn from
-Korea. It might possibly preclude the forceful establishment of a
-Communist Government, and thus contribute to a situation favorable
-for the establishment of a free and independent Korea.
-
-
-_Conclusions_
-
-United States-Soviet Union troop strengths in South and North
-Korea are approximately equal but the Soviets, assisted by a
-Soviet-controlled, equipped, and trained North Korean People’s
-(Communist) Army of 125,000 men, and geographically supported by a
-contiguous Soviet Siberia, are in an infinitely stronger military
-position.
-
-There is considerable unrest in South Korea but forces available to
-General Hodge are adequate to cope with it and to maintain order,
-though completely inadequate, even with maximum assistance from
-General MacArthur, to meet Soviet-controlled invasion of North Korean
-forces.
-
-A United States withdrawal which permitted the Soviet Union to
-dominate Korea would result in a serious political and psychological
-threat to China, including Manchuria, and Japan.
-
-The United States has a strong strategic interest in insuring
-permanent military neutralization of Korea and its denial as a base
-to the Soviet Union.
-
-The Soviets will withdraw their occupation forces just as soon as
-they can be sure that the North Korean puppet government and armed
-forces which they have created will be strong enough and sufficiently
-well indoctrinated to be relied upon to carry out Soviet objectives
-without the actual presence of Soviet troops.
-
-
-_Recommendations_
-
-It is recommended that:
-
-United States withdrawal from Korea be based upon agreements with
-the Soviet Union to effect proportional withdrawals, with as many
-guarantees as possible to safeguard Korean freedom and independence.
-
-Military aid be furnished to South Korea which would support the
-achievement of such adequate safeguards and which would envisage:
-
- Continuing to furnish arms and equipment to Korean National
- Police and Korean Coast Guard.
-
-The creation of an American-officered Korean Scout Force to replace
-the present Constabulary of sufficient strength to cope with the
-threat from the North.
-
-Continued interim occupation by United States Army forces in Korea.
-
-Advice in training of technical specialists and tactical units.
-
-
-
-
- _Bibliography_
-
-
- A
-
- _Alexander of Macedon_, by Harold Lamb, Doubleday, Doran Co., Garden
- City, N. Y. 1946.
-
- _American Mercury Magazine_, March, 1951.
-
- _Asia at the Crossroads_, by E. Alexander Powell, Century Co., N.
- Y., 1922.
-
-
- C
-
- _Caesar and Christ_, by Will Durant, Simon & Schuster, N. Y., 1944.
-
- _Challenge of the East, The_, by George E. Eddy, Farrar, N. Y., 1931.
-
- _China of Chiang Kai-shek_, a political study, by Paul M. A.
- Linebarger, World Peace Foundation, Boston, Mass., 1941.
-
- _China Shall Rise Again_, by Mei-ling Soong Chiang, Harper and
- Bros., N. Y., and London, 1940.
-
- _China in the Sun_, by Randall Gould, Doubleday and Co., Inc., N.
- Y., 1946.
-
- _Chinese Civilization_, by Marcel Granet, Alfred Knopf, N. Y., 1930.
-
- _Chinese, Their History and Culture, The_, by Kenneth Scott
- Latourette, The MacMillan Co., N. Y., 1934.
-
- _City of the Czars, The_, by Harold Lamb, Doubleday & Co., Garden
- City, N. Y., 1948.
-
- _Civilization on Trial_, Essays, by Arnold J. Toynbee, N. Y., Oxford
- University Press, 1948.
-
- _Conquest of Civilization, The_, by James H. Breasted, Harper Bros.,
- N. Y., 1938.
-
- Current Magazines and Newspapers.
-
-
- D
-
- _Discovery of Freedom, The_, by Rose Wilder Lane, The John Day Co.,
- N. Y., 1943.
-
- _Dawn of Conscience, The_, by James Henry Breasted, N. Y., London,
- Charles Scribner’s Sons, 1933.
-
-
- E
-
- _Early Empires of Central Asia, The_, by William Montgomery
- McGovern, Chapel Hill, 1939.
-
- _Economics and the Public Welfare_, by Benjamin McAlister Anderson,
- Literary Guild of America, N. Y., 1938.
-
- _Economics in One Easy Lesson_, by Henry Hazlitt, Harper and Bros.,
- N. Y. and London, 1946.
-
- _Empire of the Tsars and the Russians, The_, by Anatole Leroy
- Beaulieu, G. P. Putnam’s Sons, N. Y., 1893.
-
-
- F
-
- _Fight for the Republic of China, The_, by B. L. Putnam Weale, Dodd,
- Mead and Co., N. Y., 1917.
-
-
- G
-
- _Genghis Khan_, by Harold Lamb, Robert M. McBride and Co., N. Y.,
- 1927.
-
- _Great Globe Itself, The_, by William C. Bullitt, Charles Scribner’s
- Sons, N. Y., 1946.
-
-
- H
-
- _History of Civilization_, by James Henry Breasted, Ginn & Co., N.
- Y. and Boston, 1937.
-
- _History of Russia, A_, by Bernard Pares, Alfred A. Knopf, N. Y.,
- 1926.
-
- _History of the Russian Empire Under Peter the Great_, by Voltaire,
- Vol. XVIII, St. Hubert Guild, N. Y., 1901.
-
- _History of the Russian Revolution_, by Leon Trotsky, Vols. I, II,
- III, Simon and Schuster, N. Y., 1932.
-
-
- I
-
- _Inside Asia_, by John Gunther, Harper and Bros., N. Y. and London,
- 1942.
-
- _Intelligence Digest_—A Review of World Affairs.
-
- _International Relations of the Chinese Empire, The_, by Hosea
- Ballou Morse, Longmans, Green and Co., N. Y., Vols. I, II, III, 1918.
-
- _I Speak for the Chinese_, by Carl Crow, Harper and Bros., N. Y. and
- London, 1937.
-
- _Ivan the Terrible, Czar of Russia_, by George Backer, Random House,
- N. Y., 1950.
-
-
- J
-
- _Journey to China, A_, by Arnold J. Toynbee, London, Constable and
- Co., Ltd., 1931.
-
-
- L
-
- _Life Magazine_, The June 14, issue.
-
- _Lost Peace in China_, by George Moorad, E. P. Dutton, N. Y., 1949.
-
-
- M
-
- _Man of Independence, The_, by Jonathan Daniels, Lippincott & Co.,
- N. Y., 1940.
-
- _March of the Barbarians_, by Harold Lamb, Doubleday, Doran and Co.,
- Inc., N. Y., 1940.
-
- _March of Muscovy, The_, by Harold Lamb, Doubleday and Co., Inc.,
- Garden City, N. Y., 1948.
-
- _Marco Polo, the Venetian_, Everyman’s Library, Edited by Ernest
- Rhys, 1907.
-
-
- O
-
- _Old Civilizations of the New World_, by Hyatt Verrill,
- Bobbs-Merrill Co., N. Y., 1929.
-
-
- P
-
- _Pageant of Chinese History, The_, by Elizabeth Seeger, Longmans,
- Green and Co., N. Y., 1934.
-
- Pamphlets, Foundation for Economic Education, Irvington-on-Hudson,
- N. Y.
-
- _Practical Program for America, A_, Edited by Henry Hazlett,
- Harcourt Brace and Co., N. Y., 1932.
-
-
- R
-
- _Resistance and Reconstruction_, by Generalissimo Chiang Kai-shek,
- Harper and Bros., N. Y. and London, 1943.
-
- _Riding the Tiger_, by Harry Carr, Houghton Mifflin Co., N. Y., and
- Boston, 1934.
-
- _Russia and the Peace_, by Bernard Pares, The MacMillan Co., N. Y.,
- 1944.
-
- _Russian Enigma, The_, by William Henry Chamberlin, Charles
- Scribner’s Sons, N. Y., 1943.
-
- _Russia and the Russians_, by Edward Crankshaw, Viking Press, N. Y.,
- 1948.
-
-
- S
-
- _Siberia_, by Emil Lengyel, Random House, N. Y., 1942.
-
- _Soong Sisters, The_, by Emily Hahn, Doubleday, Doran and Co.,
- Garden City, N. Y., 1942.
-
- _Speaking Frankly_, by James F. Byrnes, Harper Bros., N. Y., 1947.
-
- _Stalin, A Critical Survey of Bolshevism_, by Boris Souvarine,
- Longmans, Green and Co., N. Y., 1939.
-
- _Stalin’s Russia and the Crisis in Socialism_, by Max Eastman, W. W.
- Norton and Co., N. Y., 1940.
-
- _Study in History, A_, by Arnold J. Toynbee, Abridgement of Vols.
- I-VI, by D. C. Somervell, N. Y., G. Cumberlege, Oxford University
- Press, 1946.
-
-
- T
-
- _Tamerlane, the Earth Shaker_, by Harold Lamb, Robert M. McBride and
- Co., N. Y., 1928.
-
- _Tinder Box of Asia, The_, by George E. Sokolsky, Doubleday, Doran
- and Co., Inc., N. Y., 1932.
-
- _Together_, by Katherine Tupper Marshall, Tupper & Love, Inc., N.
- Y., Atlanta, 1946.
-
- _Trade and Administration of the Chinese Empire, The_, by Hosea
- Ballou Morse, Longmans, Green and Co., N. Y., 1908.
-
-
- W
-
- _War in the East_, by Charles A’Court Repington, John Murray,
- London, 1905.
-
- _We’re in This with Russia_, by Wallace Carroll, Houghton Mifflin
- Co., Boston, 1942.
-
-
-
-
- _Index_
-
-
- A
-
- Acheson, 19, 26, 118.
-
- _American Mercury_, 23.
-
- Atwood, Harry E., 134.
-
- Anti-Imperialist League, 67
-
- Aristotle, 144.
-
- Attila, the Hun, 73, 74.
-
- Attlee, Prime Minister, 146.
-
-
- B
-
- “Ballentine Beer Patches,” 16.
-
- “Big Noses,” 117.
-
- Bleucher, General, 59.
-
- Borodin, Michael, 59.
-
- Bourtai, 76.
- (See _also_ Genghis Khan, favorite wife of)
-
- Browder, Earl, 50, 53, 59, 60.
-
- Byrnes, Secretary of State, 19, 24.
-
-
- C
-
- Cairo Conference, 108.
-
- Canton, Russians in, 113, 120, 121.
-
- Chang Kuo Sin, 117, 119.
-
- Checfoo, 9.
-
- Cheng Tien-shi, Dr., 129, 130.
-
- Chennault, Claire L., 119.
-
- Chiang Kai-shek, Madame, 64, 104, 106;
- building of model village by, 106, (See _also_ Soong, Sisters).
-
- Chiang Kai-shek, 7, 8, 27, 59, 62, 67, 85, 92, 93, 103-116,
- contributions of, to the U. S., 103;
- “Golden Decade” of, 104;
- mistakes of, 10;
- tragedy of, 103-116.
-
- Chinese Communist Party, 45;
- Central Committee of, 32;
- Central People’s Government, 45;
- Personalities, 45-68;
- young intelligentsia of, 57.
-
- Chinese New Year, 87.
-
- Chingwangtao, 7.
-
- Chou En-lai, 8, 13, 28, 42, 56-61, 125;
- family of, 59;
- wife of, 60, 126;
- “Executioner,” 59.
-
- Chungking, 45, 105, 106;
- destruction of, by Japanese, 106;
- model village in, 106.
-
- Churchill, 26, 33, 108.
-
- Chu Teh, 13, 38, 40, 50-56;
- as a movie “fan,” 40;
- family of, 51;
- hunting prowess of, 40;
- wives of, 51, 54.
-
- Comintern, 49.
-
- Communism, the “lure” of, 1;
- forebears of, 70-81.
-
- Communist, flag; propaganda, 82-93;
- (See _also_ Propaganda, Communist)
-
- Confucius, 50, 115.
-
- Courcy, Kenneth de, 145.
-
- “Cumshaw,” 36.
-
-
- D
-
- Dairen, 9.
-
- Daniels, Jonathan, 25.
-
- Drugs, “actedon,” 90;
- “mescaline,” 90;
- use of, 90, 91;
- on Joseph Cardinal Mindszenty, 91;
- (See _also_ Hypnotism, use of)
- on Michael Shipkov, 91;
- on Robert A. Vogeler, 91, 92;
- (See _also_ Hypnotism, use of).
-
- Democracy, as a principle, 133.
-
-
- E
-
- England, 139.
-
- Estabrooks, Dr. G. H., 91;
- (See _also_ Hypnotism, use of).
-
- Eurasia, 7.
-
- F
-
- Fifth Column, conception of, 72.
-
- Finland, 132.
-
- Foundation for Economic Education, 136.
-
- Formosa, 112, 115, 118;
- invasion of, 118-120.
-
- France, 132.
-
- Free love, 125.
-
-
- G
-
- Gallen, 59.
-
- Genghis Khan, 17, 22, 53, 68, 70, 74-78, 79, 81, 96, 99, 100, 105,
- 106, 108, 109;
- favorite wife of, 76;
- “Scourge of God,” 74;
- superstitions of, 77;
- Yassa of, 1, 78.
-
- Generalissimo, 7, 10, 17, 28, 33, 45.
-
-
- H
-
- Hankow, 115.
-
- Hatem, Dr., 63, 64;
- family of, 63, 64. (See _also_ Ma Hia-teh).
-
- Hiss, 26.
-
- Hirohito, 131.
-
- Hitler, 46, 131, 136.
-
- Hong Kong, 108, 124, 128, 129;
- treatment of British in, 129.
-
- Hoover administration, 135, 136.
-
- Hoover, J. Edgar, 137.
-
- Huns, 70, 73.
-
- Hutton, Betty, 40.
-
- Hurley, Ambassador, 10, 41, 45, 109.
-
- Hypnotism, use of, 91, 92;
- (See _also_ Estabrooks, Dr. G. H.);
- on Cardinal Mindszenty, 91, 92;
- on Robert Vogeler, 91, 92;
- (See _also_ Drugs, use of);
- on Van der Lubbe, 92;
- (See _also_ Drugs, use of).
-
-
- I
-
- International News Service, 18.
-
- International Hospital, 30, 37.
- (See _also_ Yenan).
-
-
- J
-
- Japanese, peace terms offered, 108, 115.
-
- Jefferson, Thomas, 142.
-
- Jenner, William E., 20, 22.
-
- Jessup, 26.
-
- Joffe, Adolph, 104.
-
- Judd, Walter H., 17.
-
-
- K
-
- Kalgan Pass, 9.
-
- Kung, H. H., Madame, 64.
- (See _also_ Soong, Sisters).
-
- Kung, H. H., Dr., 104.
-
- Kwangsi Province, 113.
-
-
- L
-
- Lamb, Harold, 22.
-
- Lattimore, 26.
-
- Lehey, William D., 25.
-
- Lesser concessions, theory of, 135.
-
- Li Li San, 61, 96;
- wife of, 61.
-
- _Life Magazine_, 115.
-
- Lin Piao, 62.
-
- Li Tsun-jen, General, 113.
-
- “Long March,” the, 47, 48, 54, 121.
-
- Lu Hsun Art Academy, 34, 64.
-
-
- M
-
- MacArthur, General Douglas, 22, 23, 25, 107.
-
- Madison, James, 134.
-
- Ma Hai-teh, 63, 64.
- (See _also_ Hatem, Dr.).
-
- Malinovsky, Marshall, 61.
-
- Mao Tse-tung, 13, 14, 15, 29, 33, 45-50, 54, 57, 61, 62, 63, 68, 76,
- 92, 102, 121, 125;
- daughter of, 30;
- son of, 46;
- wives of, 48;
- heroine of “Long March,” 48, 49;
- Lang Ping, 48, 49;
- Myth, 49;
- propaganda speech by, 92, 93.
-
- Manchuria, 9, 10, 11, 15, 17, 61, 94-102;
- as granary of Asia, 94;
- occupation of, by Japanese, 94;
- stripping of, by Communists, 96.
-
- Manchus, 94, 104.
-
- Marriage, New Democracy, 125-126.
-
- Marshall, General George C., 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 17, 18, 19, 24,
- 28, 56;
- at a Chinese opera, 14;
- at a Communist banquet, 14;
- in conference with Mao, 15;
- preference for Mao, 16;
- visit of, to Yenan, 12, 14, 15.
-
- McNeil, Hector, 130.
-
- Michener, James, 115.
-
- Mindszenty, Joseph Cardinal, 91;
- (See _also_ Drugs, use; Hypnotism, use of).
-
- Ming Bing, 13.
-
- Min Yuan Park, 87.
-
- Missionaries, Catholic, 34;
- Protestants, 35.
-
- Mongol, 38, 70, 72, 73, 74, 81, 100, 101.
-
- Mongolia, 9.
-
- Mossadegh, Mohammed, 146.
-
- Moses, 70, 133.
-
- Mud caves, of Yenan, 29, 44.
-
- Mukden, 95, 99.
-
-
- N
-
- Nanking, 16, 56, 58.
-
- Nan Yuan, 8.
-
- Nationalist, 9, 11;
- (See _also_ Chiang Kai-shek, tragedy of).
-
- “New Democracy,” 82;
- marriage under the, 125-126.
-
- New Life Movement, 61, 106.
-
- Nimitz, Admiral Chester, 107.
-
-
- O
-
- Open Door Policy, 9.
-
- Opera, Chinese, 14;
- Shanghai, 68.
-
- P
-
- Peace terms, Japanese, 108.
-
- Pei Yuan, 8.
-
- Peking, 7, 8, 57, 87, 122;
- capture of, 87, 122;
- famine in, 122.
-
- Personalities, Communist, 45-69.
-
- Plato, 50
-
- Politburo, 15.
-
- Port Arthur, 9.
-
- “Prisoners of War School,” 32;
- (See _also_ Yenan).
-
- Propaganda, Communist, 82-93;
- against Americans, 85;
- basic purpose of, 82;
- distortion of terms in, 82, 83;
- Democracy, 82;
- Freedom, 82, 83;
- Security, 83;
- Truth, 83;
- for children, 84, 85;
- newspapers as, 86;
- opera as, 89;
- posters as, 84;
- slogans as, 84;
- speeches as, 86;
- by Mao Tse-tung, 12, 93;
- titles as reward, 87;
- types of, two, 83.
-
-
- Q
-
- Quislings, 100.
-
- Quo Vadis, 131-148.
-
-
- R
-
- Red Curtain, Behind the, 117-130.
-
- Republic, discussion of, 133, 134.
-
- Rosenberg, Anna, 27.
-
- Roosevelt, 21, 26, 33, 108, 135.
-
- “Rosamond,” 65.
-
- Russell, Dean, 143.
-
- Russia, war potential, 138, 139.
-
- Russian advisors, 117.
-
-
- S
-
- Samarkand, Battle of, 100.
-
- Sanzo Nosako, 33.
-
- Shanghai, fall of, 119, 120, 124;
- Mayor of, 119;
- Russians in, 120;
- treatment of Americans in, 127.
- Shensi Province, 29.
-
- Shipkov, Michael, 91;
- (See _also_ Drugs, use of).
-
- Soong, Charlie, 65;
- family, 65, 104;
- Sisters, 64, 104.
-
- “Stakhanovitism,” 80.
-
- Stalin, 3, 28, 49, 50, 131.
-
- State Department, 7, 9, 27, 42.
-
- Stuart, J. Leighton, Ambassador, 24, 56.
-
- Sun Fo, 66.
-
- Sun Yat-sen, Madame, 31, 45, 64-69;
- (See _also_ Soong, Sisters).
-
- Sun Yat-sen, 47, 103;
- revolution of, 51.
-
-
- T
-
- Tamerlane, 53, 78.
-
- Tang Shan, 8.
-
- Tartars, 63, 70, 78.
-
- Tientsin, 7, 87, 88.
-
- Tipping, prohibition against, 36;
- “cumshaw,” 36.
-
- Trans-Siberian Railway, 97.
-
- Trohan, Walter, 23, 25.
-
- Trotsky, 2.
-
- Truce teams, 16.
-
- Truman, President, 7, 10, 15, 19, 22, 108, 111.
-
-
- U
-
- United States, 7, 8, 16, 117.
-
- Urals, 96, 97.
-
-
- V
-
- Vogeler, Robert A., 91;
- (See _also_ Drugs, use of; Hypnotism, use of).
-
- V-J Day, 95, 97.
-
- _Voice of America_, 118.
-
-
- W
-
- Wallace, Henry, 131.
-
- Wedemeyer, Lieutenant General Albert C., 9, 24, 111, 114, 118, 142.
-
- Wei Tao-ming, Madame, 68, 69.
-
- Wesleyan College, 65.
-
- Wife swapping, 125.
-
- Worton, Major General William Arthur, 7, 8.
-
-
- Y
-
- Yalta, 10, 12, 13, 22.
-
- Yangtse River, 60, 105.
-
- “Yassa,” 1, 78.
-
- Yeaton, Colonel Ivan D., 31.
-
- Yenan, 12, 15, 29, 30, 34, 35, 36, 37, 39, 42, 43, 48, 57, 64;
- International Hospital in, 30;
- Market place in, 35;
- “Prisoner of War School,” 32.
-
- Yenching University, 24, 56, 57.
-
-
- Z
-
- Zukov, 62.
-
-
-
-
-About the Author...
-
-
-Mary Lamar Knight, famed foreign correspondent and lecturer,
-graduated into the ranks of foreign correspondents while she was on
-a two-month “tour” of Europe in 1930. The tour lasted for five full
-years with only brief vacations and assignments at home. At that
-time Miss Knight was the only woman employed on a full-time basis in
-the Paris Bureau of the United Press Associations. In this capacity
-she covered the European continent as a feature writer in the varied
-fields of women’s fashions, crime and politics.
-
-She reported on the outstanding fashions of the Parisian designers
-as they paraded their creations into pages of history; she was the
-first woman since the days of the French Revolution to witness the
-guillotining of a famous convict in Paris; she interviewed royalty
-of many nationalities; and, most important of all, she saw and
-studied the beginnings of World War II: the propaganda build-up, the
-international deceit and intrigue, the in-human characters of the men
-who promoted the war and prepared the nations of Europe for their own
-destruction.
-
-During her varied career, Miss Knight, who is the daughter of the
-late Dr. Lucian Lamar and Edith Nelson Knight, of Atlanta, Georgia,
-has worked as a nurse at Bellevue Hospital, New York, to report on
-a bitter campaign to regulate working conditions for doctors and
-nurses; she was assigned to the New York Women’s House of Detention
-to pose as a prostitute, going to jail with Lucky Luciano’s “girls”
-and latter covered his vice trial in the courtroom; at one time she
-was assigned the role of a taxi-dance girl, and at another time to
-join the chorus line of the world-famous “Rockettes” at the lavish
-Music Hall theater; she was the first woman reporter allowed to
-invade the training camps of Joe Louis and Max Schmeling prior to
-their title fight which she covered at ringside. In 1935, the author
-embarked for China on a Norwegian freighter.
-
-Remaining in China for two years she travelled to most of the
-principal cities in China, Korea and Manchuria. At the borders of
-Mongolia she witnessed the beginnings of her RED BLIGHT of today.
-The Communists were then in the process of developing the tactics,
-the brutality, the deceit and the methods which they have so far so
-successfully employed against their homeland and the neighboring
-countries of Tibet and Korea. In China, 1935-36, Mary Lamar Knight
-had a 15-year advance in preview of the tragic days that are now
-immediately ahead for all civilized nations. She returned to China
-again in 1946, independently covering the Pauley and the Marshall
-Missions. She met and became personally acquainted with most of the
-men who dominate today’s great human conflict—Marshall, Wedemeyer,
-Ambassador Hurley, Chiang Kai-shek and Madame Chiang, Chou En-lai
-and many others. Herein she was able to objectively view the entire
-American-Chinese crisis, make a personal analysis of the appalling
-international situation and draw the conclusions which she presents
-in RED BLIGHT.
-
-In recent months Miss Knight has spent her time in bringing this
-vitally enlightening book up-to-the-minute and appearing before many
-outstanding political, civic and patriotic clubs and organizations as
-a featured speaker on Communism and its avowed principles of ruling
-or ruining the earth.
-
-Among Miss Knight’s published works are: _On My Own_, an
-autobiography, (MacMillan, 1938); _Spies versus Censors_ (Reader’s
-Digest, May, 1946) and _Red Realm in China_ (Reader’s Digest,
-February, 1947). The author was the only woman contributor to _We
-Cover the World_, the first symposium of foreign correspondents
-(Prentice-Hall).
-
-The author is available for personal appearances and speaking
-engagements. (Fees are variable.)
-
-
-
-
-A Note on KOREA ...
-
-_By Mary Lamar Knight_
-
-
-Books already have been written about the Korean situation. Although
-it is one spoke in the great Asiatic wheel, Korea is very important,
-but China still remains in the hub of the wheel. One of the greatest
-tragedies of this whole chain of events is that General Douglas
-MacArthur had the difficult—the impossible—task of trying to rescue
-the Korean chestnut from the fire—a fire which might not have ignited
-had his counsel and advice, along with that of Lieutenant General
-Albert C. Wedemeyer and others, been heeded in the first place.
-
-The Communist-inspired invasion of South Korea by the North Korean
-Communists was a trial balloon let loose by the Soviet and Chinese
-Communists to determine how far the United States and the United
-Nations would go before buying an all-out Asiatic war. It was a trick
-from the start, to draw U. S. and UN forces foremost into the area
-from which the U. S. had withdrawn in 1949. Once committed, and once
-having dispatched American—and a trickle of UN soldiers into South
-Korea, the chances were that they could be kept there indefinitely.
-We were permitted, early in the conflict, to cross the arbitrary 38th
-parallel, and to proceed at great difficulty and even greater loss
-of life, to the borders of Manchuria. Then, in typical Communist
-fashion, they struck back in the evening, almost, of our declaration
-of all but total victory. One need only to glance at a map of Korea
-to realize that the Communists, Soviet and Chinese, are in a position
-to pour millions of men into North Korea, dressed as Koreans or
-otherwise, at their will. How could we hope to do anything of a
-permanent nature in unifying Korea against the Communists? The Korean
-patriot Kim Koo, shortly before his assassination and replying to a
-question put to him by Representative Walter Judd said: “It doesn’t
-make any difference what you (the U. S.) do now. There just isn’t
-any way to get Korea so that she can be independent and secure and
-self-sustaining, until you solve the Communist problem across the
-border in Manchuria.” We solved that problem by giving that prize to
-the Soviets. It was Russia’s price for entering the war, the last six
-days of it, as an ally, even though it was rather generally known
-that Japan was ready to surrender.
-
-For every life that may have been spared by the signing of the
-questionable Yalta agreement, thousands of American and Korean GI’s,
-and Korean civilians are now dead, dying and maimed. This little
-Florida-shaped country of Korea, cut up by outsiders, is a tragic
-example of failure to think beyond military objectives. We cannot
-defend Korea from Russian attack without an all-out war. We can only
-prolong the agony. If it was right for us to leave Korea in 1949, can
-we, honestly, justify our re-entry there in 1950—at the price we have
-paid?
-
-There yet remain other fates to be decided—Formosa, the Philippines
-and numerous islands of the Pacific, whether we occupy them or not.
-Have we not already proven that, “It is fantastic to imagine that we
-can convert our enemies into our friends by treating our friends as
-if they were our enemies”?
-
-But to understand the overall picture, one must begin with a
-knowledge of the background that has made China and the United States
-the estranged bed-fellow nations which they have become. The historic
-removal of Douglas MacArthur from all of his commands in the Far
-East, by President Truman at 1 a. m. on April 11, 1951, will have
-far-reaching effects. Due to this move, disaster looms before us
-larger than ever, especially for the United States and Great Britain.
-Nearly a month before the news of the impending MacArthur dismissal
-by the President “leaked” to the American press, headlines had
-appeared in Danish newspapers saying: “British Say ‘MacArthur Must
-go’.”
-
-The average reader, in all probability, sees only a difference of
-opinion in the policies of the political and military leadership on
-the conduct of World War III, but the facts go deeper than this.
-There appears to be a determination on the part of those who are
-playing international politics, to obtain and control world power.
-MacArthur, definitely, was the greatest single stumbling block in
-their path. To be in a position, militarily, to bomb enemy supply
-sources, and yet forbidden, by political directives from Washington,
-to do this, put greater handicaps on MacArthur than he was willing
-to take. With the MacArthur removal, Truman will bend every effort
-toward silencing all who remain opposed to his Acheson-approved
-manifesto.
-
-On April 1, 1951, correspondent Kenneth de Courcy (_Intelligence
-Digest_—A Review of World Affairs) cabled from London:
-
- “There is no longer even a definite objective in the Korean war.
- Each nation or organization concerned in it seems to have a
- different objective; while each high commander seems to have a
- private idea of what would represent success or victory. If the
- powers that be cannot agree even in Korea, it is hardly surprising
- that they cannot devise an agreed strategy for the entire world.
- Mr. Truman, who is becoming very tired, seems determined to await
- decisive trends of public opinion. His private views and conclusions
- are not likely to be pressed unless he is convinced that public
- opinion is more than ready for them. In fact, American public
- opinion is far ahead of its leadership. Mr. Truman however, has not
- yet been convinced of this....
-
- “The Kremlin reckons on a steadily progressive weakening of the
- Atlantic group of powers. Meanwhile, it is intended to increase the
- flow of warlike supplies and indirect help to Asiatic Communist
- forces, rather than to the European satellites. Major developments
- are timed to take place in Asia before the end of this year, which
- by the middle of 1952, will give the USSR access to certain valuable
- and essential raw materials which now have to be purchased from
- outside the Soviet system.... The Kremlin thinks war with the West
- will become inevitable ... but hopes to be able to postpone this war
- until Burma and India have been brought within the Soviet sphere of
- influence.”
-
-To follow the MacArthur program has been called a “colossal gamble,”
-but what greater gamble can there be than sitting back and waiting
-for the enemy to come and destroy us? Was England able to stop
-Hitler by appeasement? Nor will the present British Labor Government
-be able to silence the Chinese Communists by promising them Formosa
-and a hand in the Japanese peace treaty if, indeed, the Japanese
-accept such a treaty.
-
-Those who still believe that a “deal” can be made with Stalin or
-Communists anywhere, just do not know the history of Communism or of
-Communism’s forbears. MacArthur’s removal from the scene at this time
-is cause for jubilation among the radically inclined the world over,
-for this particular American hero was Stalin’s Enemy Number One.
-
-Another great boon to the Chinese and Korean Reds is that Truman
-has virtually promised them that their Manchurian bases will not be
-bombed by us, unless of course, they step out of line and bomb us
-first. Thus, they can continue to kill and maim our boys without fear
-of too much retaliation on our part. We won two great victories on
-the battlefields of World Wars I and II, but we lost them both at
-conference tables. Political double-talk always gives the enemy a far
-greater victory than could be won on the battlefield.
-
-The political moves made by the powers that be in Washington serve
-only to cancel out our military victories. On November 16, 1950,
-when Russia vetoed the Security Council’s resolution demanding
-that China clear out of Korea, she put the blame for the Korean
-war squarely in her own lap. But as long as Stalin and the Kremlin
-remain within the United Nations, this international body politic
-will remain hamstrung, for it will be used as an instrument to give
-aid and comfort to Communists everywhere in achieving military
-aggression against the Western Hemisphere. For Russia, as a member
-of the United Nations, with veto power, has sent no troops to Korea
-to fight the aggression. But why should she be exempt when others
-are not? A United Nations operating in opposite directions cannot be
-very united. With one side of the UN fighting aggression and another
-faction pushing it, defeat can be the only outcome. When the Korean
-war first burst into actual flame, and we discovered that Russia was
-openly, as well as secretly, supporting the North Koreans, why did
-we not then expel her from the UN and declare her an enemy of the
-peace? Had we had the courage to do so, the story would be different
-today. Now, with our hands tied behind our backs, we wait for the
-enemy to make the next move in the most tragic game of chess ever
-played with flesh and blood pawns.
-
-It is difficult to understand why General MacArthur was prevented
-from arming some 400,000 unarmed South Koreans. On April 6, 1951, he
-stated that political decisions beyond his authority prevented him
-from doing this, but why were they deprived of fighting for their
-own land? And why were American fathers and sons to be butchered
-in battle to free those who would gladly fight for themselves, but
-for political interference? No short term good ever derived from a
-long term evil, nor can any amount of political expediency replace
-military emergency.
-
-Terrible sabotage in this country is not unlikely. On April 7, 1951,
-J. Edgar Hoover stood before the Senate Committee and said: “A hard
-core of Communists trained in sabotage is ready to strike at vital
-industries ...” and he added that this would be one of the most
-effective weapons that Stalin could use against the United States.
-
-Despite denials from the White House and State Department, we know
-that Russia has a solid network of spies and undercover agents
-operating in every department of our national life, operating to
-destroy us from within, circumventing the need for any long-range
-attack.
-
-To those who stubbornly maintain that the blood of more than sixty
-thousand American boys killed or wounded in Korea, in addition to an
-almost equal number of what are called non-battle casualties, still
-constitutes merely a “police action,” I say in all reverence, may God
-forgive you. We are at war now. No amount of waiting or appeasement
-will put off World War III. We are in it up to our necks.
-
-
-
-
-Your First Step....
-
-
-“The journey of a thousand miles begins with just one step ...” says
-a Chinese proverb.
-
-Millions of Americans today know that we have to take that “one step”
-individually, if order is to be restored to the national house in
-which we live.
-
-You have read in this volume of the many wrong steps in the wrong
-direction that have been taken by our national planners. These have
-resulted in the human turmoil, the domestic unrest, and in undeclared
-war against Communism. Our battlefield casualties have already passed
-the seventy thousand mark.
-
-Every American must act NOW to preserve our Constitutional Way of
-Life. But before concerted political action can be taken the facts
-must be known. RED BLIGHT tells these facts!
-
-Now _you_ can take _your_ first step in the right direction by
-helping to disseminate the truth about the RED BLIGHT that is
-engulfing the earth. You can do this by placing RED BLIGHT into the
-hands of as many people as possible.
-
-RED BLIGHT is bound in two editions: Paper bound, $1.50 per copy;
-Cloth Bound, $2.50 per copy. Please use the coupon below for placing
-your order.
-
-
- LORRIN L. MORRISON, _Publisher_,
- 1915 South Western Avenue,
- Los Angeles 18, California.
-
-Enclosed please find remittance in the amount of $.......... for
-which please send .... copy/ies of the .......... Bound Edition of
-RED BLIGHT, by _Mary Lamar Knight_, as indicated in Remittance Advice
-column below.
-
- REMITTANCE ADVISE
- QUAN. EDITION PRICE AMT. NAME....................
-
- .... _Paper_ $1.50 ..... Street Address..........
- .... _Cloth_ 2.50 .....
- _Mailing, per book_, 30c .....
- _In Calif. add Sales Taxes_ ..... City and Zone...........
- —————
- _Total Remittance_ ..... State...................
-
-
-
-
- Transcriber’s Notes
-
- pg 10 Changed at no time had be to: he
- pg 13 Changed spelling of Moa Tse-tung to: Mao
- pg 15 Changed swayed to its ryhthmic to: rhythmic
- pg 22 Changed methods of Genghis Kahn to: Khan
- pg 23 Changed that these are dissillusioning to: disillusioning
- pg 25 Changed Eighth Regiment at Fort Screvan to: Screven
- pg 26 Added quote after: finest regiments in the Army.
- pg 27 Changed May God forebid to: forbid
- pg 31 Changed this last shipemnt to: shipment
- pg 32 Changed proved to be a diobolical to: diabolical
- pg 46 Changed Moa’s childhood was to: Mao’s
- pg 50 Changed devotion to Confuscius to: Confucius
- pg 52 Changed fire of vitrolic to: vitriolic
- pg 56 Replaced comma with period at: foreign dignitaries with ease
- pg 56 Changed did such a consumate to: consummate
- pg 58 Changed more violent and vitrolic to: vitriolic
- pg 58 Added double quote to end of sentence: return to China
- from Europe?
- pg 66 Changed publicity she so abhored to: abhorred
- pg 67 Changed capitalization of world Anti-Imperialist to: World
- pg 67 Changed capitalization of a cable to the anti-Imperialist
- to: Anti
- pg 67 Changed mind and persuasive personalitly to: personality
- pg 72 Changed horsemen in the earily to: early
- pg 73 Changed dirty and disheaveled to: disheveled
- pg 86 Changed effort is wasted on superflous to: superfluous
- pg 91 Changed warrant a demontration to: demonstration
- pg 105 Changed capitalization of it had become obvious to: It
- pg 135 Changed established in this county to: country
- pg 138 Changed humiliation and degredation to: degradation
- pg 141 Changed economically and phychologically to: psychologically
- pg 142 Changed use our almost unprecendented to: unprecedented
- pg 146 Changed dispatch datelined Teheran to: Tehran
- pg 152 Changed Russian reentry to: re-entry
- pg 153 Changed facilitate China’s post-war to: postwar
- pg 154 Added comma after: Korea, the political
- pg 155 Changed bound ideolologically to: ideologically
- pg 163 Changed developments as portentious to: portentous
- pg 164 Changed program of assistant to: assistance
- pg 164 Changed eight years of war. to: war,
- pg 166 Changed to preserve Korea to: Korea’s
- pg 167 Removed comma from: first meeting March 8, 1946
- pg 169 Changed continue as long is to: as
- pg 169 Changed In the over-all administration to: overall
- pg 174 Added space between words eastern and half
- pg 177 Changed land for rise to: rice
- pg 177 Changed chaotic hyperinflation to: hyper-inflation
- pg 178 Removed period after: 1915-19 to 2.0
- pg 178 Changed diet until indigeous to: indigenous
- pg 179 Changed over 300 gram to: grams
- pg 179 Changed salt an sugar to: and
- pg 180 Changed long-staple Egyption to: Egyptian
- pg 181 Changed in the time alloted to: allotted
- pg 182 Removed duplicate word and their own own country
- pg 184 Changed Army in its over-all to: overall
- pg 186 Changed expansion of miltaristic to: militaristic
- pg 189 Changed Charles Schribner’s to: Scribner’s
- pg 191 Changed Education, Irrington-on Hudson to: Irvington
- pg 193 Changed spelling of Aristole to Aristotle and changed page
- number from 143 to 144
- pg 193 Changed spelling of Centrol People’s Government to: Central
- pg 193 Changed spelling of Crinese New Year to: Chinese
- pg 193 Changed period to semicolon after: Drugs, use of, 90, 91
- pg 193 Changed period to semicolon after:
- Chiang Kai-shek, Madame, 64, 104, 106
- pg 194 Fixed page references under Hypnotism
- pg 194 Replaced semi-colon with period after: International News
- Service
- pg 195 Changed spelling under Mindszenty of Hynotism to: Hypnotism
- pg 196 Changed Sun Yet-sen to: Yat-sen
- pg 196 Changed spelling of: Hynotism under Vogeler to: Hypnotism
-
-*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK RED BLIGHT ***
-
-Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will
-be renamed.
-
-Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright
-law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works,
-so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the
-United States without permission and without paying copyright
-royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part
-of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm
-concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark,
-and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following
-the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use
-of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for
-copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very
-easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation
-of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project
-Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away--you may
-do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected
-by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark
-license, especially commercial redistribution.
-
-START: FULL LICENSE
-
-THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
-PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
-
-To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
-distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
-(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
-Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full
-Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at
-www.gutenberg.org/license.
-
-Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-
-1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
-and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
-(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
-the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or
-destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your
-possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a
-Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound
-by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the
-person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph
-1.E.8.
-
-1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be
-used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
-agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
-things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
-paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this
-agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.
-
-1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the
-Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection
-of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual
-works in the collection are in the public domain in the United
-States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the
-United States and you are located in the United States, we do not
-claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing,
-displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as
-all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope
-that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting
-free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm
-works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the
-Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily
-comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the
-same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when
-you share it without charge with others.
-
-1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
-what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are
-in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States,
-check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this
-agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing,
-distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any
-other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no
-representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any
-country other than the United States.
-
-1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
-
-1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other
-immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear
-prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work
-on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the
-phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed,
-performed, viewed, copied or distributed:
-
- This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and
- most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no
- restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it
- under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this
- eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the
- United States, you will have to check the laws of the country where
- you are located before using this eBook.
-
-1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is
-derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not
-contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the
-copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in
-the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are
-redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project
-Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply
-either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or
-obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm
-trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
-
-1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
-with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
-must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any
-additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms
-will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works
-posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the
-beginning of this work.
-
-1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
-License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
-work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
-
-1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
-electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
-prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
-active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
-Gutenberg-tm License.
-
-1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
-compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including
-any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access
-to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format
-other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official
-version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm website
-(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense
-to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means
-of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain
-Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the
-full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
-
-1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
-performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
-unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
-
-1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
-access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-provided that:
-
-* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
- the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
- you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed
- to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has
- agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project
- Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid
- within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are
- legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty
- payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project
- Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in
- Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg
- Literary Archive Foundation."
-
-* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
- you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
- does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
- License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all
- copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue
- all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm
- works.
-
-* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of
- any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
- electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
- receipt of the work.
-
-* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
- distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
-
-1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than
-are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing
-from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of
-the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the Foundation as set
-forth in Section 3 below.
-
-1.F.
-
-1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
-effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
-works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project
-Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may
-contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate
-or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other
-intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or
-other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or
-cannot be read by your equipment.
-
-1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
-of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
-Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
-Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
-liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
-fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
-LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
-PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
-TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
-LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
-INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
-DAMAGE.
-
-1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
-defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
-receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
-written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
-received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium
-with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you
-with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in
-lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person
-or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second
-opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If
-the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing
-without further opportunities to fix the problem.
-
-1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
-in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO
-OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
-LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
-
-1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
-warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of
-damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement
-violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the
-agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or
-limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or
-unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the
-remaining provisions.
-
-1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
-trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
-providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in
-accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the
-production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses,
-including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of
-the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this
-or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or
-additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any
-Defect you cause.
-
-Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
-
-Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
-electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of
-computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It
-exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations
-from people in all walks of life.
-
-Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
-assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
-goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
-remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
-Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
-and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future
-generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see
-Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at
-www.gutenberg.org
-
-Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation
-
-The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit
-501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
-state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
-Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
-number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by
-U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
-
-The Foundation's business office is located at 809 North 1500 West,
-Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up
-to date contact information can be found at the Foundation's website
-and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact
-
-Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
-Literary Archive Foundation
-
-Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without
-widespread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
-increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
-freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest
-array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
-($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
-status with the IRS.
-
-The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
-charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
-States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
-considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
-with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
-where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND
-DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular
-state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate
-
-While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
-have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
-against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
-approach us with offers to donate.
-
-International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
-any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
-outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
-
-Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation
-methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
-ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To
-donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate
-
-Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-
-Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project
-Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be
-freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and
-distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of
-volunteer support.
-
-Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
-editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in
-the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not
-necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper
-edition.
-
-Most people start at our website which has the main PG search
-facility: www.gutenberg.org
-
-This website includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
-including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
-subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.